Purchas his pilgrimage. Or Relations of the vvorld and the religions obserued in all ages and places discouered, from the Creation vnto this present In foure partes. This first containeth a theologicall and geographicall historie of Asia, Africa, and America, with the ilands adiacent. Declaring the ancient religions before the Floud ... With briefe descriptions of the countries, nations, states, discoueries, priuate and publike customes, and the most remarkable rarities of nature, or humane industrie, in the same. By Samuel Purchas, minister at Estwood in Essex.

(Book 5)

OF THE EAST-INDIES: AND OF THE SEAS AND ILANDS ABOVT ASIA, WITH THEIR RELIGIONS. (Book 5)

THE FIFTH BOOKE. (Book 5)

CHAP. I.

Of India in Generall, and of the ancient Rites there obserued.

THe name of India, is now applied to all farre-distant countries, not in the extreme limits of Asia alone, but euen to whole America, through the errour of Columbus and his fellowes; who at their first arriuall in the Westerne world, thought that they had met with Ophir, and the Indian Regions of the East. But the Ancients also comprehended vnder this name a huge Tract of Land, no lesse in the iudgement of Alexanders followers, in his Easterne Inuasions, then the third part of the Earth; Ctefias accounted it one halfe of Asia. Ptolomey a 1.1 and other Geogra∣phers, did vsually diuide India by the Riuer Ganges, into two parts, one on this side Ganges, and the other beyond. Although heere we finde no lesse difficultie concerning Ganges, which the most account the same with Guenga, that falleth into the Gulfe of Bengala, which they also imagine to be that, which of the Ancients is called Sin••••s Gangeticus: Other b 1.2 esteeme the Riuer Cantan (whereon Cantan chiefe Citie of one of the Chinian Prouinces, whereof we haue so lately taken our leaue) to be that Ganges: Of which minde are Mercator, Maginus, Gotardus Arthus, and their disciples. M. Paulus c 1.3 diuideth India into three parts, the Lesse, the Greater, which he calleth Malabar; and Aba••siae, betwixt them both. Dom. Niger d 1.4 reckoneth the same number; the first, from the Riuer Indus (whence this name India flowed) vnto Barius, hee calleth Caisarat: the second or middle, from thence to Caberis, Miniber: from thence Eastward to Ganges, he nameth Maabar, and all these on this side Ganges: beyond it placing Magin, or Mangi. Ptolomey maketh the Sinae, to be next beyond India extra Gangem, on which he abutteth them on the West: and therfore if Sinae be China, then are they by him placed quite beyond India:

and therefore Mercater and Maginus esteeme Cathay to bee the Region of the Sinae.

It is our part to leaute this matter to the discussing and deciding of others, and to hold on our perambulation through this wide and spacious Region: first relating the generalities and antiquities thereof: and next proceeding from China (where we left) vnto the next adioyning Nations, certainly reputed Indian, how vncertaine soeuer Ganges runneth, whether on this side, or beyond them: to which when we haue ad∣ded our suruey of the Ilands adioning to the Continent of Asia, wee may end this Booke, and our promised Asian Discouery. Vnder the name of India, heere we com∣prehend all that Tract betweene Indus and the Persian Empire on the West, vnto Chi∣na Eastward, as it trendeth betwixt the Tartarian and the Indian Seas.

Semiramis first inuaded India, as Ninus her husband had done before to Bactria, but not with like successe. For although she had thought to haue encountred the In∣dian Elephants with her counterfeits made of Oxe-hides, sowed together in that shape, and stuffed with Hay: for which vse she caused three hundred thousand beasts to be slaine, which might both serue in the battell for shew, and before-hand to exer∣cise her horse to such sights; and, if we beleeue e 1.5 Antiquitie, mustered in her huge army no lesse then three millions of foot-men, and fiue hundred thousand of horse: Yet Stanrobates, at that time the Indian Monarch, brake her Forces, and chased her out of the field.

In these first times the Indians f 1.6 are said to liue like the Scythians, without houses, Cities, Temples, in a wandering course with their Tents, liuing on the barke of the tree Tala, and wilde Venison, the skinnes whereof were their garments. In all India were no seruants, but all free-men. These things were altered by Bacchus or Dio∣nysius, who made an Expedition hither, not so much with Armes, as with Arts. Hee taught them the vse of wine, oyle, and sacrificing: in memory whereof, Posteritie ho∣nored him for a god. Of this the Poets, and histories of Alexander, and others make much mention. So doth Suidas tell of one Brachman, that prescribed the Rites and Lawes of the Brachmanes: Solinus, of Hydaspes; and others, of Ganges, Hercules, and the rest, with much vncertaintie. The first certaine notice of those parts was by Alex∣anders inuasion and conquest, who yet pierced but a small way in this vast part of the world, except that little we haue of the Persians exploits in these parts. The g 1.7 Romans were hindered by the Persians and Parthians, from passing hither with their armies, al∣though their Ambassages be reported, both to Augustus, and long after to Antonius Pius.

Strabo in his fifteenth booke is large in this Indian subiect. He reporteth out of Aristohulus, that the Riuer Indus, by force of an Earthquake, changed his chanell; thereby a great part of the neighbour Region being turned into a desert. For in this, Indus is like vnto Nilus, in that, without it, the Countrey would be a wildernesse, and therefore is also worshipped of the Inhabitants. It receiueth fifteene other Riuers into it. He mentioneth the Cathei not farre from thence, which after happily gaue name vnto Cathay. To let passe the strange Creatures, which some ascribe to these parts, as Dragons of incredible bignesse, those great Apes, which by imitation of men in aray, made Alexanders Campe to arme themselues against so ridiculous au e∣nemie.

The Indians are seuen sorts: h 1.8 The first in estimation, and fewest in number, were their Philosophers. These kept publike Acts once a yere before the King, and he which in his obseruations was found three times false, was condemned to perpetuall silence. The second sort were husband-men, which paid the King (the onely owner of all the land) a fourth part of the encrease. The third was of shepheards and huntsmen, which wandered in Tents. The fourth Artificers. The fifth souldiers. The sixth Magistrates. The seuenth Courtiers, and those of his Priuy Counsell. If any woman killeth the King in his drunkennesse, she is rewarded with the marriage of his sonne and heire.

If any depriue another of a member, besides like for like, he loseth his hand; and, if

it be an Artificer, his life. They strangle their 〈8 letters〉〈8 letters〉, that it may bee so offered whole to their Idols.

Of their Philosophers, or men learned and religious, the i 1.9 Brachmanes obtaine the first place, as being neerest in sect to the Greekes. These are after their man∣ner Nazarites from the wombe. So soone as their mother is conceiued of them, there are learned men appointed which come to the mother, with songs, containing pre∣cepts of chastitie. As they grow in yeares they change their Masters. They haue their places of exercise in a groue nigh to the Citie, where they are busied in graue confe∣rences. They eat no liuing creatures, nor haue vse of women; liue frugally, and lie vpon skinnes. They will instruct such as will heare them, but their hearers must neither sneese, nor spit, nor speake. When they haue in this strict ••oor so spent seuen and thir∣tie yeares, they may liue more at pleasure and libertie, in diet, habit, proper habitati∣on, and the vse of gold, and marriage. They conceale their mysteries from their wiues, left they should blabbe them abroad. They esteeme this life as mans conception, but his death-day to be his birth-day vnto that true and happy life, to him which hath beene rightly religious. They hold the world to be created, corruptible, round, ruled by the high GOD. Water they imagine to haue beene the beginning of making the world; and that besides the foure Elements, there is a fifth Nature, where of the Hea∣uen and Starres consist. They in••reate of the immortalitie of the Soule, and of the tor∣ments in Hell, and many such like matters.

The k 1.10 Germanes another Order of religious on learned men, are honored amongst them: especially such of them as liue in the woods, and of the woods, both for their diet of those wilde fruits, and their habit of the barkes of trees, not acquainted with Bacchus or Venus any more then with Ce••es. They speake not to the Kings, when they aske counsell of them, but by messengers; and doe pacifie the angrie gods, as is sup∣posed, by their holinesse.

Next in honor to these, are certaine Mondi••••nts, which liue of Rice and Barley, which any man at the first asking giueth them, together with entertainment into their houses. These professe skill in Physicke, and to remedie diseases, wounds, and sterilizie; very constant in labour and hardship. Others there are, Inchauters and Di∣uiners, Masters of ceremonies about the dead; which wander thorow townes and Cities. Some there are more ciuill and secular, in their life professing like pietie and holinesle. Women also are admitted vnto the fellowship of their studies in this Phi∣losophie, not to their beds. Aristobulus writeth, that he saw two of these Brachmanes, the one an old man shauen, the other yong with long haire, which sometimes resor∣ted to the Market-place, and were honored as Counsellours, and freely tooke what they pleased, of any thing there to be sold, for their sustenance. They were annointed with Sesamine oyle, wherewith, and with hony, they tempered their bread. They were admitted to Alexanders table, where they gaue lessons of patience l 1.11 : and after going to a place not farre off, the old man lying downe with his face vpward, sustained the Sunne and showers terrible violence. The yonger standing on one foot, held in both his hands a peece of wood of three cubits lifted vp, and shifted feete, as the other was wearie: and so they continued euery day. The yong man returned home afterward, but the old man followed the King, with whom hee changed his habit and life, for which, when as he was by some reproued, he answered that he had fulfilled the fortie yeares exercise, which he had vowed. Onesieritus saith, that Alexander, hearing of some religious Obseruants, which went naked, and exercised themselues to much hardship, and would m 1.12 not come to others, but would bid men, if they would haue a∣ny thing with them, to come to them; sent him vnto them, who found fifteene of them twentie furlongs from the Citie, each of them obseruing his owne gesture of sitting, standing, or lying naked, and not stirring till Sun-setting, in that vnsupportable heate, at which time they returned into the Citie. Ca••anu•• was one of them. Hee afterward followed Alexander into Persia, where beginning to be sicke, he caused a great pile or frame of wood to be made, wherein he placed himselfe in a golden chaire, and caused

fire to be put to, in which he was voluntarily consumed, telling (if they tell true) that he would meete Alexander at Babylon, the place fatall to Alexanders death. This Ca∣ianus told Onesicritus of a golden world, where meale was as plentifull as dust, and fountaines streamed milke, hony, wine and oyle. Which Countrey, by men turned into wantonnesse, Iupiter altered and detained, imposing a life of hardnes and labour, which while men followed, they enioyed abundance; but now thar men begin to sur∣fet and grow disobedient, there is danger of vniuersall destruction. When he had thus spoken, he bade him, if he would heare further, strippe himselfe, and lye naked vpon these stones. But Mandanis, n 1.13 another of them, reproued Calanus for his harshnesse, and, commending Alexander for his loue to learning, said that they inured their bo∣dies to labour for the confirmation of their mindes against passions. For his nakednes he alledged, that that was the best house which needed least furniture of houshold. He added that they searched the secrets of Nature, and that returning into the Citie, if they met with any carrying figges or grapes, they receiued of him gratis; if oyle, they pow∣red it on them: and all mens houses and goods were open to them, euen to the parlors of their wiues. When they were entered, they imparted the wisdome of their senten∣ces, as the other communicated his meats. If they feared any disease, they preuented the same with fire, as was now said of Calanus. Megasthenes reproueth this Calanus, as Alexanders trencher-Chaplaine, and commendeth Mandanis, saying, that when Alexanders messengers told him that he must come to the Sonne of Iupiter, with pro∣mise of rewards, if he came, otherwise menacing torture: he answered, that neither was he Iupiters sonne, nor did possesse any great part of the earth: as for himselfe, hee neither respected his gifts, nor feared his threatnings; for while he liued, India yeel∣ded him sufficient; if he died, he should be freed from age, and exchange for a better and purer life. Whereupon he saith, Alexander both pardoned and praised him. Cli∣tarchus reporteth also, that to the 'Brachmanes are opposed another Sect called Pram∣ne, men full of subtiltie and contention, which derided the studies of others in Physiologie and Astronomie. He diuideth the Brachmanes into those of the mountaines, clo∣thed in Deeres skinnes, which carried scrippes, full of rootes, and medicines, which they applied with certaine charmes to cure diseases: and the second sort hee calleth Gymnetae, those naked ones before mentioned (whereof it seemeth they were called Gymnosophistae) which had women amongst them, but not in carnall knowledge: the third he calleth Ciuill, which liued in Cities and Villages, wearing fine linnen, and apparelled in skinnes. Nicolans Damascenus saith, o 1.14 that at Antiochia he saw the Indi∣an Embassadours, sent to Augustus from Porus, the King (as his letter contained) of six hundred Kings, with presents, among which was a female Viper of sixteene cu∣bites (one of like bignesse Strabo saith he saw sent out of Egypt) and a Cray-fish of three cubits, and a Partrich bigger then a Vulture. Zarmonochagas, one of these Indi∣an Philosophers, was one of the Embassadours, who at Athens burned himselfe, not moued thereto by aduersitie, but by prosperitie, which had in all things followed his desires, left in his succeeding age it might alter: and therefore entred the fire, annoin∣ted, naked, laughing. His Epitaph was: Heere lieth Zarmanochagas the Indian, of Bargosa, which according to his Countrey-custome, made himselfe immortall.

Suidas telleth of a Nation called Brachmanes, inhabiting an Iland in the sea, where Alexander erected a pillar, with inscription, that he had passed so farre. They liue an hundred and fiftie yeares, and haue neither bread, wine, flesh, nor mettals, nor houses, but liue of the fruits, and cleare water, and are very religious. Their wiues liue apart on the other side Ganges, to whom they passe in Iuly and August, and after fortie daies re∣turne home againe. When the wife hath had two children, shee neither knoweth her husband after, nor any other man; which is obserued also, when in fiue yeares hee can raise no issue of her, he after abstaineth. These p 1.15 slay no beasts in sacrifice, but affirme that GOD better accepteth vnbloudie sacrifices of Prayer, and more delighteth in man, his owne Image.

Hyctaspes, q 1.16 the father of Darius, is reported to haue learned of the Indian Philoso∣phers

or Brachmanes both Aftronomie and Rites of Religion, with which he after in∣structed the Persian Mag••. None r 1.17 might sacrifice without one of these to direct him, who only among the Indians had skill of Diuination, and authoritie to sacrifice, and were free from other seruices.

The Indians are said to worship Iupiter, Ganges, and other Heroes of their Coun∣trey. Some of the Indian Nations accounted it dishonorable (as they doe also at this day) for the wiues not to be burned with their deceased husbands. Thomas s 1.18 the Apo∣stle preached the Gospell to the Indians, and so did Bartholomew also, and destroyed their Idols (which wrought great wonders amongst them) Astaroth, Beirith, and Wal∣dath, as Ab∣dias t 1.19 reporteth, who euen in this Historie may easily be conuinced to bee counterfeit, in ascribing the names and religions of the Grecians, Iuno, Neptune, Bere∣cinthia, to the Indians; besides those vnchristian reuenges, in killing so many of their aduersaries, and olde Heathenish, new Popish Ceremonies, fathered on those A∣postles.

To let passe that Abdias, a fit Bishop of that mystieall Babylon: u 1.20 Alexander ab A∣lexandro reckoneth among their gods the greatest trees (to cut which, was with them a capitall crime) and a Dragon, in honor of Liber Pater. Hercules they honoured in a Giant-like statue, whose daughter Pandaea, the Pandeans say, was their first Queene. These affirme, that in the hill Meros, which they account sacred to Iupiter, is a caue wherein Liber or Bacchus was nourished; from whence the fable grew, that hee was borne of Iupiters thigh; for so •••••• signifieth. Some of the Indians (saith x 1.21 Solinus) kill no beasts, nor eat flesh; some liue only on fish. Some kill their parents and kins∣folkes, before age or sicknesse withereth them, and deuoure their flesh, an argument not of villany, but pietie amongst them. Their y 1.22 Gymnosophists, from the Sunne-ri∣sing to the setting, fixe their eyes on the bright orbe of the Sunne, thence obseruing certaine secrets. Hereunto he addeth the tales of men with dogges heads; of others with one legge, and yet very swift of foot: of Pigmeis, of such as liue only by sent: of hoary infants; of some like Polyphemus, with one eye in their fore-head; of others with eares to the ground, wherein many of the old writers are Poets, and the moderne, Painters, as in many other monsters of men and beasts. We seeke credit with the wise, and not admiration of fooles.

The z 1.23 Indians neuer sacrificed, or saluted their Idols without dances. They were neuer rewarded with military honor or spoile, except they brought into the Campe an enemies head in their hand. They punished periury with the losse of fingers and toes; and such as deceiued their Clients, with perpetuall silence; and besides, they were disa∣bled vnto any Office. Their Lawes are not written; their contracts without seales, or witnesses.

In the hills, a 1.24 called Hemodi, Bacchus is said to haue erected pillars, to witnes his Conquest, as farre as that Easterne Ocean, as Hercules did in the West. He built the Citie Nysa, where he left his sicke and aged souldiers, which Alexander spared, b 1.25 and suffered to their owne libertie, for Dionisius or Baecchus his sake. And as Bacehus ere∣cted Pillars, so did Alexander Altars to the twelue chiefe gods, as high as towers, mo∣numents of his farre trauels, where he obserued solemne games and sacrifices. He c 1.26 sa∣crificed also, not to his countrey gods alone, but to Hydaspis, Acesine, and Indus, In∣dian riuers, and to other gods, with other Rites and sacrifices, then he had before vsed: drowning a golden bowle in Indus, and another in the Ocean, in his Ethnicke super∣stition. To him did the Indian Magi (so doth Arrianns d 1.27 call their Brachmanes) say, that he was but as other men, sauing that he had lesse rest, and was more troublesome, and being dead, should enioy no more land, then would serue to couer his bodie. And euery man (said they) stamping with their feet on the ground, hath so much as he trea∣deth on. Eusebius e 1.28 reciteth out of Bardesanes Syrus, that amongst the Indians, and Ba∣ctrians, were many thousand Brachmanes, which as well by tradition, as law, worship∣ped no Image, norate any quicke creature, dranke no wine nor beere, only attending on Diuine things: whereas the other Indians are very vicious, yea some hunt men, sa∣crifice, and deuoure them, and were as Idolaters.

Pliny besidee his relations of monsters in these parts, telleth of their Philosophers (called Gymnosophists like things to that, which is before mētioned of their beholding the Sunne from the rising to the setting, with fixed eyes, standing on the hot sands all day-long, on one foot by course. Tooth-ache, with other diseases of the head & eyes, spitting, and other sicknesses, are either exiles or strangers to the Indians. Tally saith, f 1.29 that in this naked plight these Philosophers endure the cold of Winter, and snowes of Caucasus, while they liue, and the burning fire at their end without any plaining. The Indian women also striue which shall be married to her husbands corpse, in a fiery chariot, riding with him into another world..

Philostratus in his large Legend of the life of Apollouius Tyanaeus, their Philosophi∣call Saint, relateth g 1.30 his pilgrimage into India, to the Brachmanes, in which he came to Nysa, where was a Temple of Bacchus built by himselfe, planted about with Bayes, Vines, and Iuie, whose shady roofe couered the same. In the middest was an Image: all instruments belonging to the Vintage were there, some of gold, others of siluer hang∣ed vp, sacred to Dionysius. He after h 1.31 came to Taxilla the Citie royall, where he found the Temple of the Sunne, and in it, the Iuory Image of Aiax, with golden statues of Alexander: and ouer-against the same, brazen Images of Porus. The walls of redde marble shined like fire, interlaid with gold, resembling lightning. The Mosaical floore pouldred with pearles. The King heere offered sacrifice to the Sunne. For the pepper∣trees, i 1.32 which (he saith) are great, and abound with Apes, who gather the pepper for the Indians gratis, brought thereunto by a wile of the Indians, who first gather some, and lay it on heapes, and then goe away: at their returne, finding many the like heaps made by the aemulous Apes, I leaue it to the Authors authority, and Readers credulity: as that also which followeth of the Inhabitants of Paraca in these parts, who by eating a Dragons heart and liuer, attaine to vnderstand the language (if so I may terme it) of beasts. And if you maruell at this, k 1.33 that which followes will amaze you; of men which doe not, as the former, communicate with the nature of beasts, but of spirits, making themselues at their pleasure inuisible. Heere in a holy hill was a pit, whereof no man drinketh, by which the Indians binde their faith, as by the most solemne and inuiola∣ble oath. In this pit was a fiery receptacle, where men were purged from their offen∣ces: and two tubs (of Whetstones, I should say) of raines and windes, the one being opened yeelding raines, and the other, windes.

In this place were many Indian, Grecian, and Egyptian statues, with their Rites ob∣serued accordingly. This hill was reported the middle of India, and euery noone-tide they sing Hymnes to the Sunne for that fire, borrowed (they say) from his beames. The Brachmanes sleepe on the ground, on hearbes strewed two cubits thicke, that by this eleuation they might more signifie their deuotion to the Sunne, whome they laud night and day. He found l 1.34 Iarchas their principall, with seuen associates, sitting on Thrones of Brasse. Iarchas could tell Apollonius his Name, Nation, and Aduentures, which had befallen him all his life. They annoint themselues, then wash in a fountaine, and after this, being crowned, enter the Temple in solemne Procession, with Daunces, smiting the ground with Roddes, wherewith the earth, like vnto waues, did moue and rayse it selfe. Iarchas being asked by Apollonius, what he thought of himselfe and his companie, answered, That they were Gods, because they were good men: that he him∣selfe had sometime beene Ganges, and Apollonius before had beene an Aegyptian Ma∣riner, an attendant which there waited on them had beene Palamedes, whose misfor∣tunes we read of in the warres of Troy, thus in new bodies presenting themselues to the world. The world, he said, was a liuing creature, compounded of fiue Elements, with diuers other things of Pygmeys, which liued vnder the Earth, of Gryphons, &c. Thus much I thought to adde of Apollonius, because some vaine Philosophers haue impudently compared him to our Sauiour, that the Reader might parallel this Legend with the Gospell out of this darkenesse, the more to admire that more then admirable Light. And thus much out of Philostratus, of the Brachmanes. The Gymnosophists are by him placed, and by that name knowne, in Aegypt and Aethiopia, whither also Apollonius went to visit them.

CHAP. II.

Of the Indian Prouinces next adioyning to China.

CAuchin-China a 1.35 is an Indian Kingdome, situate betweene the Riuer Cantan, and the Kingdome of Siam, diuided into three Prouinces, and as many Kings, but one of them is Paramount. It b 1.36 aboundeth with Gold, Siluer, Aloes, Porcelane, and Silke. They are Idolaters and Pagans, and c 1.37 haue had some deuotion to the Popish Christianitie, moued thereto by certaine pictures of our Ladie, of the last Iudge∣ment, and Hell (a new kinde of preaching) and haue erected many Crosses amongst them, of which the Friers report (after their fashion) some miracles. Their Religion seemeth little to differ from that of the Chinois.

Nigh vnto this Kingdome is Champa, the name of a Kingdome, and chiefe Citie thereof, of great Traffique, especially of Lignum Aloes, which groweth there in the Mountaines, prized at the weight in Siluer, which they vse in Bathes, and in the Fune∣rals of great Princes. In Religion they are as the former.

Camboia lyeth Southward from thence, a great and populous Countrie, full of Ele∣phants and Abada's (this Beast is the Rhinoceros:) Here also they begin to honour the Crosse, as Frier Siluester (a man, as they say, much reuerenced by the King, and honou∣red of the people) hath taught them. When the King dieth, d 1.38 his women are burned, and his Nobles doe voluntarily sacrifice themselues in the same fire. The women are generally burned with their husbands at their death. The Camboyans dealt treche∣rously e 1.39 with the Hollanders, An. 1602. whome they inuited to the shore, with pro∣mise of certaine Buffes, and then cruelly slew them. They detained the Admirall on shore, to be redeemed, with some of their Ordinance. When they intend a iourney, they vse diuination with the feet of a Henne, to know whether it will be luckie, or no; and as the Wizard shall answere, they dispose of themselues, eyther to goe, or stay.

On this side of Camboia, is f 1.40 Siam, mother-Citie of a Kingdome bearing the same name, in which are reckoned thirtie thousand families of Mores, besides the Naturals. In these parts are huge woods, harbours of Lions, Tigers, Ownces, and Mariches, which haue maidens faces and Scorpions tailes. Heere runneth Menan out of that huge lake Chiamay, which yeeldeth this and other Riuers of like nature to Nilus in E∣gypt. They haue amongst them many religious g 1.41 men, which leade an austere life, and therefore had in great reputation of holinesse. These liue in common: they may not marry, nor speake to a woman (which fault is punished with death) they goe alway bare-foot, in poore aray, eating nothing but Rice and greene herbes, which they beg from doore to doore. They craue it not, nor take it with their hands, but goe with a wallet at their backes alwaies, with their eyes modestly fixed on the ground, and cal∣ling or knocking, stand still, till they receiue answere, or some thing be put in their wallets. Many times they set themselues naked in the heate of the Sunne: notwith∣standing that himselfe, with such direct beames, together with his frie (whole armies of Gnats) doe their vtmost malice vpon them. They rise at Mid-night to pray vn∣to their Idols, which they doe in Quires, as the Friers doe. They may not buy, sell, or take any Rents, which, if they should doe, would bring on them the imputation of Heretikes. Some Merchants of Siam being at Canton, and hearing that Frier Martin Ignacio and his companions, were there imprisoned, for •••••• that Chi∣nian Kingdome without licence, they visited them, and seeing their poore Friers weedes, they, besides other almes, offered to pay their ransome, if money would doe it.

The Siamites h 1.42 commonly hold, that GOD created all thinges, rewardeth the good, punisheth the bad: That man hath two Spirits; one good, to keepe; and the

other euill, to tempt, continually attending him. They build many and faire Tem∣ples, and place in them many Images of Saints, which sometime liued vertuously, and now are in Heauen. They haue one Statue fiftie paces long, which is sacred to the Father of men. For they thinke that he was sent from aboue, and that of him were borne certaine persons that suffered Martyrdome for the loue of GOD. Their Priests are clothed in yellow long garments. (This colour is esteemed holy, and eue∣rie yellow thing, for the resemblance which it hath with Gold, and with the Sunne, is hallowed to GOD.) Besides that which is before said of their strict orders, they may not nourish Hennes, because of their female Sexe. To drinke Wine, is punished in their Priests with stoning. They haue many Fasts in the yeare, but one especially, in which the People frequenteth the Temples and their Sermons. They haue their canonicall houres by day and night for their holy things. They hold, that the World shall last eight thousand yeares, whereof sixe thousand are passed, and then it shall be consumed with fire: at which time shall be opened in Heauen seuen eyes of the Sunne, which shall drie vp the Waters, and burne vp the Earth. In the ashes shall re∣maine two Egges, whence shall come forth one man and one woman, which shall re∣new the World. But there shall be no more Salt, but fresh Riuers and Lakes, which shall cause the Earth, without mans labour, to abound in plentie of good thinges. The Siamites are the sinke of the Easterue Supers∣titions, which they deriue to manie Nations.

The inhabitants of this Kingdome are much giuen to pleasure and riot: they re∣fuse the vse of manuall Arts, but addict themselues to Husbandrie. They haue i 1.43 pub∣like Schooles, where they teach Lawes and Religion in the vulgar Language: other Sciences they learne in a more learned Tongue. They worship innumerable Idols, but especially the foure Elements; according to which his Sect, each man maketh choise of his buriall. They which worshipped the Earth, are therein buried: the Fire burneth the dead carkasses of them which obserued it: in the Ayre are hanged (to feast that ayrie-winged people with their flesh) those which adored the Ayre, being aliue. The water drowneth those which had aliue beene drowned in that Waterie Re∣ligion. Euery King, at his first entrance to the Crowne, erecteth a Temple, which he adorneth with high Steeples, and innumerable Idols. In the Citie of Socotay is one of mettall, fourescore spannes high.

The Kingdome of Siam comprehendeth that Aurea Chersonesus of Ptolomey, de∣scribed by Arrianus in his Periplus, (the Mappe whereof Ortelius set forth 1597) which Tremellius and Iunius iudge to be Salomons Ophir. The Land trendeth long and narrow, and containeth fiue hundred Leagues of Sea-coast, compassing from Chaupa to Tavay. But of this space the Arabians, or Moores, haue vsurped two hun∣dred, with the Townes of Patane, Paam, Ior, and Malacca, now in possession of the Portugals: and the Kingdomes of Aua, Chencran, Caipumo, and Brema, haue shared also therein. Odia k 1.44 is the chiefe Citie thereof, containing foure hundred thousand households, and serueth the King with fiftie thousand souldiors: and to the Riuer Ca∣piumo (on which it standeth) belong two hundred thousand Vessels. This King hath nine Kingdomes subiect to him, and thirtie thousand Elephants, whereof three thou∣sand are trained to the warres. His Nobles hold their Lands in a kind of Knights-Ser∣uice, like the Turkish Timars (yet onely for terme of life) and without the Kings pay serue him, whensoeuer he appointeth, with twentie thousand horse, and two hundred and fiftie thousand foot. The Countrey is compassed with the high Hills of Iangoma, Brema, or Brama, and Aua, and is it selfe plaine, in situation and fertilitie (caused by inundation) like to Aegypt. The Lai are tributaries to Siam, for feare of the Gueoni, Caniballa and Man-eaters liuing: in the Mountaines adiacent; against whome the Siamite defendeth them, and inuaded those Gueoni one time with twentie thousand horse, two hundred and fiftie thousand footmen, and tenne thousand Elephants for Carriages and Warre. Caesar Frederike l 1.45 reporteth, That in the yeare 1567 the King of Pegu besieged the King of Siam, in his chiefe Citie, with an Armie of 1400000 men, and lay before it 21.moneths, and had 500000 fresh souldiors sent him in supply,

and yet had not preuailed, if Treason had not more furthered his designes then force. The gates were one night set open, and the Peguans entred: which when the Siamite perceiued, he poysoned himselfe, leauing his Children and Kingdome a prey to the Conquerer: whose triumphall returne, Fredericke (then in Pegu) beheld. Since that time the Kings of Siam haue beene tributaries to Pegu.

After this Peguan had raigned seuen and thirtie yeares, he left his Kingdomes, but not his fortunes, to his sonne: who taking displeasure against the Siamite, his vassall, sent for him to come to him, which he refused. And thereupon he entred into his Countrey with nine hundred thousand men, and besieged him in his chiefe Citie: which he, seeking politicke delayes, made semblance still to deliuer, vntill in the third moneth after (which was March) the Riuer ouerflowed the Countrey six score miles about, after his yerely custome, and partly drowned, partly committed to the Siamites, attending in boats for this bootie, to be slaughtered, that huge Armie; of which, scarce threescore and tenne thousand returned to Martavan, and those without Elephants and Horses. And when the King of Pegu proceeded in his attempts with like successe, the Siamite, at last, besieged him in Pegu, his Royall Citie, An. 1596. But hearing a rumor of the Portugals comming to helpe him, he raysed his siege. These are the reports of Franciscus Fernandes, a Iesuite. Of the Peguan wee shall speake more in the next Chapter.

Malacca is now subiect to the Portugals, who haue there their Bishop, and a Col∣ledge of Iesuites besides the Castle. It sometime was subiect to Siam, from whome it rebelled, after that Marchandise had made them rich. The Ayre is here very vn∣holsome: their Speech, a deuised Language of the first founders (for it is not long since it was but a few Fishers Cottages:) their Religion is Mahumetan, as a great part of the Coast here about is. Maginus calleth it the Centre of the Easterne Trafficke. They are m 1.46 proud of that their Language; wherein they deuise many Sonnets and a∣morous Poesies. The Malayos, or Countrey people, goe naked, with a Cloth about their middle, and a little Roll of Cloth about their heads. Lodonico Barthema (who was there before the Portugals knew it) supposed, that here arriued more shippes then in any Citie in the world. The Riuer Gaza, neere thereunto, is more, after his reckoning, then fifteene myles ouer. The people in the Countrey (which com∣passeth about two hundred and threescore myles) lodge in Trees, for feare of Ty∣gers. After that Alphonsus n 1.47 Albuquerque had conquered Malacca, the Moores, dis∣possessed there, seated themselues in diuerse places along the Coast, and some of them vsurped the title of Kings.

Patane o 1.48 is a Citie betweene Malacca and Siam, chiefe of that Kingdome, where∣to it giueth name, in the height of seuen degrees. The buildings are of Wood and Reed, but artificially wrought. The Mesquit (for many of them are Mahumetanes) is of Bricke. The Chinois are more then the natiue inhabitants. They are of an Ash∣colour. The vse p 1.49 three Languages; the Malayan (which to them is naturall) the Sian, and Chinan. The first is written like the Hebrew, from the right hand; the second, like the Latine, from the left, and almost in like Characters; the third, from the right to the left, with a descent from the toppe to the bottome. The Chinois haue idolatrous Temples, and so haue the Sians, wherein are many golden Statues; the Priests which attend them are clothed in yellow. They haue sacred youths which are their Oracles. The people when they enquire of them, sit a conuenient distance from the Images, and obserue the yong mans gestures (who with his haire disheuelled lyeth prostrate before the Idoll) singing and playing on Instruments, vntill he arise, and standeth vp. For then, as possessed of the Deuill, he runneth vp and downe with a terrible countenance, and maketh a stirre, as if he would kill himselfe, and them that stand by, with a sword which he hath in his hand. Then the people prostrating themselues, request him to declare the Deuils Oracle, and he answereth as pleaseth him; his lyes being accounted Oracles. Adulterie is here a capitall offence, the father of the malefactor being the Executioner, or his next kinsman, if hee bee

dead: yet is this vice common (notwithstanding this rigor) by reason of the womens vnbridled lust.

The Kingdome was gouerned many yeres by a Queene, who gaue good entertain∣ment to the Hollanders. Iames Neccy and his fellowes, An. 1602. after their double misfortune and madnesse, which had befalne them, the one in iest, the other in earnest; this at Macao in China, where they were, and knew it not, and setting twentie m•••• on shore * 1.50 , neuer saw them againe, but heard, that the Portugals had caused fifteene of them to be hanged: the other at Auarella Falca, in 11. degrees ½. where they found the Tract of Carts, and footings of Beasts, but could not see a man, nor shoot a Beast. They guessed, that the people liued as the Tartars, wandring in Carts and Tents, with∣out any setled dwelling. The place was by them called Sotternym, by reason that many of their companie had lost the vse of reason, and became madde, with eating a certaine fruit there growing, like to Plummes, with a tender stone, which continued till they had slept. Had they knowne then the easinesse of the cure, it had beene bet∣ter then any Comedie to haue tickled their Splene, and prouoked laughter r 1.51 , to see one fighting against the enemies, which assaulted him at his Cabbin: to heare ano∣ther with piteous shrikes crie out on the multitude of Deuils and Hobgoblins, which affrighted him: a third sees strange sights, and cryes out, the shippe is full of stran∣gers: and whiles one, in more pleasing distraction, enioyeth (and ioyeth in that di∣stracted pleasure) the sight of GOD and his Angels, another (transported by this hu∣moured Charon) with dreadfull and gastly lookes trembles at his supposed sights of the Deuill, and his hellish associates. It were a madnesse to relate how exceedingly this their madnesse was diuersified, and how many Acts this Tragicall Comedie had, till sleepe had dispersed those fumes wherewith that fruit had distracted their braines. From thence (as is said) they came to Patane, where the Queene entertained them in good sort, and to their contentment.

As the difference of their writing, in such neerenesse of dwelling, is very much, so no lesse is found in their Religions. The Batauians are Mahumetanes. The Chinois and Siams are Ethnikes, in that diuersitie of Rites which you haue heard. Whiles the Hollanders were there, one of those youths, in that Propheticall distraction before∣mentioned, warned them to depart from thence; for a great fire would otherwise con∣sume them: whereupon many forsooke their habitation, and yet no fire happened. They also saw the execution of their seuere Law against Adulterie, on two noble Per∣sonages, whose lewd familiaritie being detected, she chose to be strangled, and he to be stabbed (the Law permitting them their choise of the kindes of death) which by the fathers of the parties was executed on them. In single persons it is accounted no crime. And if a foreine Marchant come to trade there, they vse to aske him, if hee neede not a woman: yea, many young women offer their seruice; and the price and time being agreed on, shee, whome he pleaseth to chuse, goeth with him to his house, and in the day performeth the office of a Seruant, in the night of a Con∣cubine: but then neither of them may seeke change of pleasure, without great perill.

The Siamites that liue here, weare two or three balls of Gold or Siluer, as bigge as a Tennis-ball, in their yards, as wee shall after obserue in Pegu. The Mahumetans weare them not. The Queene keepes her selfe close at home among her women; of which, some may not marrie (but yet may doe worse) others may, hauing first ob∣tained the Queenes licence. It is seldome that shee is seene; yet sometimes shee is, when shee rideth on an Elephant in Progresse, for her recreation. And for Elephants, they haue a deuise to take them in this sort. Some ride into the s 1.52 Woods on a tame Elephant, and when they espie a wilde one, they prouoke him to fight. Whiles these are fastened in the encounter, by the teeth, or tuskes, each striuing to ouerthrow the other, some come behinde the wilde Elephant, and fa∣sten his hinder feete, and so eyther kill him for his Teeth, or by famine tame him.

Since this time t 1.53 , the Hollanders haue had much trading at Patane; and the King of Ior, moued with their good successe against the Portugals, ioyned his Nauie to theirs, to chase them out of those parts. Yea, they haue braued the Portugals, euen before Goa, the Seat of their Viceroy; and in Nouember, 1604, at Calecut u 1.54 entred into so∣lemne League with the Samaryn, and the Hollanders, against them: and the next yeare they wonne from the Portugals the Castles of Amboyne and Tidore, not to mention many other prizes taken from them by the Hollanders at sundrie times. In the yeare 1605, Cornelius Matelivius was sent to the Indies with twelue shippes; and the next yeare after Paulus à Caerden, with twelue more. And Matelive x 1.55 besie∣ged Malaca in the yeare 1608, and on the seuenteenth of August was a great fight by Sea, betwixt the Portugals and Hollanders. But in this attempt they had not suc∣cesse answerable to their desire. He that will not onely reade, but in manner see, the most of these exploits of the Hollanders, with other rarities of the Indies, may resort to Theodoricke y 1.56 and Israel de Bry, who haue in liuely stampes expressed these Naui∣gations, with the obseruations of Linschoten, and others.

CHAP. III.

Of the Kingdome of Pegu, or Brama.

PEgu a 1.57 is the Citie Royall of the Kingdome Brema, or Brama, the Nati∣on where began the greatnesse of the late Kings. These Bramans in∣habited neere the Lake Chiamay, among whome the King of Pegu had his Lieutenants or Viceroyes: One whereof (the Deputie of Tan∣gu) about threescore and tenne yeares since, rebelled against him, and surprised the Kingdomes of Prom, Mellntay, Calam, Bacam, Miran∣du, Aua, all peopled with the Bramans, trending Northwards a hundred and fiftie Leagues. He after attempted Siam with an Armie of three hundred thousand, and ••ent three months in making way through the huge Woods and inaccessible Places, but atchieued not his purpose. After his returne, he assayled Pegu, and conquered it; and then returned the second time 1567, as in the former Chapter is mentioned. b 1.58 He subiected to his Seignorie twelue Kingdomes, which Fernandes thus rehearseth: The Kingdome of Cavelan, where are the best Rubies and Saphyres: secondly, that of Aua, the bowels whereof are filled with Mines of Copper, Lead, & Siluer: the third Bacan, enriched with Mines of Gold: Tungran, the fourth, aboundeth with Lac c 1.59 and Lead: such is Prom, the fifth: The sixt is Iangoma, stored with Copper, Muske, Pepper, Silke, Siluer, Gold: Lauran, the seuenth, had Beioim enough to lade shippes: the eight and ninth are the Kingdomes of Trucon, Staples of China-marchandise: the tenth and ele∣uenth are the Diademes of Cublan, betweene Aua and China, poudered with precious stones: Siam, whence we last came, is the last of the twelue; in the inuasion whereof he armed a million and threescore thousand men (which number is short of d 1.60 Frederickes reckoning, except we ascribe that surplusage to Victuallers, Voluntaries, and Seruants and Attendants on the baggage:) which Armie (saith Fernandes) he tythed out of his people, taking one onely of tenne. Hee so abounded with wealth, that a hundred shippes, fraughted with Rice, seemed to diminish nothing of the plentie. The Fields are said to yeeld three haruests in a yeares and of Gemmes the store is beyond estima∣tion, and almost maketh them there short of the estimation of Gemmes; But this wealth, then wanting no store, had, when 'Fernandes writ this 1598, a contrane vi∣cissitude, of no store, but of want, euen of those thinges which Nature exacteth, as necessarie proppes of life. Scarcely of so many millions were left seuen thousand persons, Men, Women, and Children, to participate in the Kings imprisonment or Siege in his Tower, and those feeding on mans flesh, the parents requiring

of the children that life which before they had giuen, to sustaine their owne, and now layed them not in their bosomes, but in their bowels, the children became liuing Se∣pulchres of their scaree-dead parents. The stronger preyed vpon the weaker: and if their flesh was eaten vp before by their owne hunger, leauing nothing but skinne and bones to the hungrie assault of these raueners, they ripped the bellie, and deuoured their inward parts, and breaking the skull, sucked out the braines raw. Yea, the weaker sexe was by the strength of famine armed with no lesse butcherly despight a∣gainst whomsoeuer they could meete in the streetes of the Citie; with their kniues, which they carried about them, as harbengers to their teeth, in these inhospitall inhu∣mane-humane banquets.

And thus did the besieged Citizens, while the King endured in his Tower no small part of like miserie, besides the indignitie, so to be by his owne vassalls straitned, and after slaughtered. But such is the iust hand of the King of Kings, who regardeth not persons, but as he sheweth Mercie to the mercifull, so doth he reserue Vengeance for crueltie and Tyrannie. Pardon me, Reader, if on this spectacle I cause thee, with my selfe, to stay a while and wonder. The Sunne, in his daily iourney round about this vast Globe, saw few equall (that I say no more) to this Peguan greatnesse, and yet in a small space, he that is higher then the Highest, hath abated and abased this Magnifi∣cence lower then the lowliest of his Princes.

After the death of that Braman Conqueror, his sonne, in the second moneth of his succeeding Raigne, hearing that thé King of Aua, his tributarie and vncle, was plot∣ting some conspiracie, he committed to prison fortie of his Nobles, partners in that new Prolect, and bringing them all, with their Parents, Wiues, Children, Friends, and Acquaintance into a Wood, set e 1.61 fire thereon, commaunding to cut them in pieces, whosoeuer escaped out of the flame. This kindled another fire in the hearts of his discontented subiects, which was not quenched, but with his ouerthrow. He warred on his vncle, the King of Aua, with no great aduantage, till they both agreeing to trie it by single Combat on Elephants, Pegu obtained the Conquest. In the meane time the Siamite with an Armle marched to the borders of Pegu, diuulging rumours. That he came to succour his Lord against the Avan Rebell. The King enraged here∣at, sent presently part of his forces to take him, and present him captiue: but the souldiors refused to follow the Generall in this Enterprise, and returned to their owne houses. The King, after his returne, sent to Siam, by faire speeches to persuade him to come to him: He refused his presence, but denied not his wonted Tributes. Hereupon the King, after two yeares prouision for the Warre, made that vnhappie Expedition in the former Chapter mentioned. And there the waters taking part with the Siamite, he tried once and againe the like fortunes of warre. He sent his brother the King of Iangoina, and his owne sonne twice; which did much harme to the Si••∣mites, and receiued no little themselues; neuer returning without losse of halfe their armie, and of his owne soune, in the last inuasion slaine with a shot. Relentlesse hee (inflamed rather with his losses) determined another Expedition in his owne person; and therefore laid vp store of prouision in barnes at Martauan, Murmulan, Tauay, and Tànassarin, three yeares together, purposing then to employ all the Peguans in this enterprise. But they weary of forren calamities, f 1.62 hidde themselues in woods and wil∣dernesses, and some turned Talopores: so they call their religious persons. Many sold themselues slaues. The King persisting, in his person gaue order to his vncle Ximibe∣gus, to take a muster of all the people, and to entertaine halfe of them for the warres. But he missing so many, which had by those new courses preuented this seruice, ac∣quainteth the King therewith; who enioyneth the late professed Talopoyes to resigne their habite, the yong men to be compelled to warfare, the old men to be exiled to the Bramans, where after he caused them to be exchanged for horses. He caused all the Peguans also to be branded in the right hand, that they might be knowne. This made them entertaine thoughts of rebellion, which was first practised by the Colmians, who set a new King ouer them.

The Peguan sent an Armie against them, with charge to burne or bring away all they could finde among them, which they did, together with many of the people of both Sexes, which he (after his manner) setting Wood about them burned. And when the rest (not able to Warre against their King and famine at once,) submitted themselues, with g 1.63 exquisite torments he slew them all. He then sent to his sonne, the King of Aua, to transplant those people of euery Age & Sexe, to people these forlorne Desolations of Pegu. They, vnacquainted with this aire, brake forth in diseases, wherewith they infect∣ed also the naturall Inhabitants: which plague made such hauock, that many in impati∣ence cast themselues into the Riuer. The Murmulans with helpe of the Siamites seised on their Castle, whom the King besieged a yeere together, and then was forced from thence by the Siamites sudden irruption, with losse of the most of his people: the hor∣ses, Elephants, & country it selfe remaining their recompence. And the Peguan Cap∣taines also, fearing their Maisters tyranny, became subiects to the Siamite, whose whole families this tyrant with fire & water destroyed, so that all the tract from Pegu to Mar∣taua and Murmulan was made a Wildernes. These things done, hee sent for his yonger sonne, the King of Pr••m, and commanded him to the siege of Murmulan: who, vtterly mis••••king the attempt, conuaied himselfe in the night homewards, with purpose of re∣bellion.

The King of Siam not ignorant of this Peguan estate, inuaded the countrey in har∣uest-time, and therefore that, which they could, they conuayed into barnes, the rest was fired. He proceeded and laide siege to Pegu: in which at that time were a hun∣dred and fifty thousand men, and three thousand peeces of ordinance, a thousand whereof were Brasse: but (as is said) for feare of the Portugales, which were said to haue entred into Siam by the way of Camboia he departed, leauing Famine behinde as Lieutenant of his Warres, which caused the Forrenners, then in Pegu for the de∣fence thereof, to get them to their owne homes. Those few which remained, liued with prouision from Tangu. The King sent to his Deputy in Tangu, to come to him with all the Inhabitants of the Countrey and their store, leauing his Wife, and some few to guard the Citie. He answered that he would send halfe, and to demaund all were vnreasonable. The King sends foure Noble men with Souldiours to force him hereun∣to. But he slayeth the leaders, and seiseth on their followers. Thus the Famine encrea∣sing, and the people eating one another, the King numbreth the Citizens, among whom he findeth seuen thousand Siamites, whom he commanded to be slaine, not lea∣uing aboue thirty thousand of all sorts in the Citie. His sonne, the King of Prom, which had now stood out three yeares, began to relent and sue for pardon, with promise to bring the Promans (to the number of fifty thousand) to the Citie, whereat his Father reioiced, and sealed his pardon which hee sent him with many gifts. h 1.64 But his chiefe counsellor, authour of this rebellion, fearing all the blame would bee laide on him, poisoned the Prince: himselfe, aspiring to the Kingdome, was within one weeke de∣stroyed: and the Nobles, euery man seeking to seise the state to himselfe, caused that of those fiftie thousand, within two moneths space, whiles euery weeke they had a new Prince, scarse remained fiftie men fit for Warre, which departed to Pegu, three or foure in a Ship, leauing their Countrey to the habitation of wilde beasts.

The Natiues of Pegu are not quite extinct, but many of them are fledde into other Kingdomes; of whom, and of the Bramans, Iangoma numbreth a hundred and twenty thousand: Oracan, twentie thousand: Siam, a hundred thousand: and the King of Iangoma is able (they say) to arme a million of men.

The Talapoyes perswaded the Iangoman to depose his brother of Pegu. Hee al∣ledged his oath vnto his Father, while he liued. They reply, that no oath might prohi∣bite, if he placed his brother in a Vahat (or golden Throne) to be adored for a God. And partly with this (I may not call it) reason: and partly, as Xerxos alleadged for him∣selfe, because that his elder brother was borne before his Father was King, and because his mother was the former King of Pegu's daughter, he perswaded himselfe that it was lawfull.

And thus vvas the state of this mightie Kingdome in the yeare 1598, brought

to one Citie, which also was now become a withered carkasse, and well neare the Se∣pulchre of it selfe, and (as mischiefes come not alone) beseeged by Mogus, King of Orracan.

Andreas i 1.65 Boues (in his Letters the 28. of March, 1600.) thus finisheth this Trage∣die. When the King of Pegu saw himselfe in such streites, besieged by the Kings of Orracan, or Arracan, and Tangu, he yeelded himselfe to the King of Tangu: vvho dealt treacherously with him, and cut off his head, as hee did to the Queene likewise, and the Prince. Hee then hasted to the Tower of Pegu, vvhere he found as much gold and Iewels as laded six hundred Elephants, and as many Horses, besides siluer and other mettalls of smaller price. The King of Arracan then absent, and angry that the King of Tangu (contrarie to promise) had seised all the treasure to himselfe, he pur∣posed to inuade his kingdome, and to that intent, had the aide of many Portugales (amongst whom this Iesuite was one) who saw the wayes and fieldes, lately so fer∣tile, now full strewed with dead mens bones and Skulles, and in the Riuers all passage of Ships hindered by the Carkasses of men. The King of Arracan found in the towne aforesaid, three millions of siluer, with the Artillerie: and then remained Lord of Pegu. Bnt the Kings of Siam and Iangoma preuented his enterprise for Tan∣gu, vvhich they inuaded to depriue him of his treasures. The King of Siam twice as∣sailed Martauan with repulse, vvherevpon, hee caused two of his cowardly Cap∣taines k 1.66 to bee cast into Cauldrons of scaulding Oile: and the third time conquered that kingdome.

Thus haue you heard of the power and subuersion of this great Monarchy: so much the more lamentable, because their fall was from such a height. The Countrey is so fertile, that at what time so euer Corne bee put into the ground, the paiment is good vvith increase. I haue seene vvich mine eyes (saith Caesar Frederike) that they haue eaten Serpents, Scorpions, all manner of Hearbes and grasse. Such fertilitie, and such stomackes, as they make credible the reports of their huge Armies, so doe they make more terrible the reports of their desolations. This that I speake of their diet, I vnderstand not of their extremitie and Famine, but ordinarily. M^r. Fitch saith the same, that they eate Rootes, Hearbes, Leaues, Dogges, Cats, Rats, and Snakes, they refuse almost nothing.

It is aboue a hundred yeares since Vertomannus was there, who in company of a Persian Marchant went to visit the King, who then had warres in Aua. They went in a Boate all of one peece of Wood, fifteene or sixteene paces long. The Oares were Canes, and the Mast was one Cane as bigge as a Herring-Barrell. The King wore as many Iewels as vvere worth a great Citie, which made him in the night time to shine as the Sunne. Hee had then a sacrifice to doe to the Diuell, and the next day the Persian presented him with rich Coralls, vvhich hee tooke in so good worth, that hee gaue him as many Rubies as were vvorth a hundred thousand du∣cats.

The King, that liued when Maister Fitch l 1.67 was there, had one Wife, and three hun∣dred Concubines: of whom hee was said to haue fourescore and ten Children. Hee sate in iudgement almost euery day. They vse no speech in their sutes, but giue vp their Supplications, written in the Leaues of a Tree with the point of an Iron bigger then a bodkin. These Leaues are of an Elne long, and two inches broad: they are also double. Hee which giueth in his Supplication standeth a little off, with a present: which, if the King granteth his request, he accepteth; if not, hee returneth vvith his present.

Pegu is (or at least in a more vnhappy tense, when they were there, was) a Cittie great, strong, and very faire, with walls of stone, and great ditches round about it, with many Crocodiles in them. There are two townes; the olde, in which the Merchants a∣bide, and the houses are made of Canes called Bambos: and the new, for the King and his Nobilitie. The Citie is square with faire walles, hauing in each square fiue Gates, be∣sides many Turrets for Centinels to watch, made of Wood, and gilded very faire. The streetes are straight as a Line from one Gate to another: and so broad, that ten or

twelue men may ride a-front through them. On both sides at euery mans doore is set a Coco-tree, yeelding a faire shew, and comfortable shadow, that a man might walke in the shade all day. The Houses are made of Wood, and couered with Tiles. The Kings house is in the middest, walled and ditched about: and the houses within of wood sumptuously wrought and gilded. And the house wherein his Pagode or Idoll stan∣deth, is couered with Tiles of siluer, and all the walles are gilded with Gold. Within the first Gate of the Kings House was a large roome, on both sides whereof were houses made for the Kings Elephants. Among the rest hee had foure white Elephants, a thing rare in Nature, but more precious in his estimation. For this is part of his Royall Title, The King of the White Elephants. And if any other hath any bee will seeke by fauour or force to haue the same, which (some m 1.68 say) was the cause of the quarrell betwixt him and the King of Siam. Great seruice was done vnto them. Euery one of these white E∣lephants stood in an house gilded with Gold, and were fed in vessels of siluer gilt. One of them, as hee went euery day to the Riuer to bee washed, passed vnder a Cano∣pie of Cloth of Golde or Silke, carried by six or eight men; as many going before playing on Drummes or other Instruments. At his comming out of the Riuer, a Gen∣tleman washed his feete in a Siluer Bason. There were of blacke Elephants nine Cu∣bits high. The King was said to haue aboue fiue thousand Elephants of Warre. There was about a mile from Pegu, a place builded vvith a faire Court i•• it, to take wilde Elephants in a Groue: which they doe by the Female Elephants, trained to this pur∣pose, and annointed with a certaine Oyle, which causeth the wilde Elephant to follow her. n 1.69 When the Hunts men haue brought the Elephant neere to the Citie, they send vvord thereof, and many horse-men and foote-men come out and cause the Female to take a streight way, which leadeth to the place where shee en••reth, and he after her•• for it is like a Wood. When they are in, the Gate is shutte, and they get out the Fe∣male. The wilde one seeing himselfe alone, weepeth, and runneth against the walles which are made of strong Trees: some of them breake their teeth therewith. Then they prick him with sha••pe Canes, and cause him to goe into a strait house, and there fasten him with a rope, and let him fast three or foure daies, and then bring a Female to him, with meate and drinke, within few daies taming him. When they goe into the Warres, they set a frame of wood vpon their backes (bound with great Cordes) wherein sit foure or six men, which fight with Gunnes, Darts, Arrowes, and other weapons. All Authors agree, that no beast commeth so neere the reason of a man as the Elephant, yea they seeme to goe before some men in conceit, haughtinesse, desire of glory, thankefulnes, &c.

The Peguans are beardlesse: and carrie pinsers about them to plucke out the haires if any growe. They blacke their Teeth, for they say a Dogge hath white teeth. The men of Pegu, Aua, Iangoma and Brama weare balles in their yards, which they put in the skinne beeing cut, and vveare, for euery Childe one, till they haue three, and may take them out at pleasure: the least is as bigge as any Wall-out: the biggest as bigge as a little Hennes Egge. They were inuented to preuent Sodo∣my, which they vse more then any people in the world: Abusing the Male-Sexe, causeth the women also to weare scant clothes, that as they goe, their thigh is seene bare, to prouoke men to lust. If the King giue any one of his Balles, it is a great iewell accounted: they heale the place in six or eight daies. The Bramas that are of the kings bloud pricke some part of their skinne, and put therein a blacke colour, which last∣eth alway. If any Marchants resort thither, he shall haue many Maides (saith o 1.70 Lins∣choten) offered him by their parents to take his choise, and hauing agreed with the parents he may, for the time of his abode, vse her as his slaue, or his Concubine, with∣out any discredit to her. Yea, if hee come againe, after shee is married, hee may, for the time hee stayeth there, demaund her in like sort to his vse. And vvhen a man marrieth, hee vvill request some of his friendes to lye the first night vvith his Bride. There are also among them that sowe vp the priuie part of their. Daughters, leauing onely passage for Vrine: which, when they marry passe vnder the Surgeons hand for remedy. Caspar Balby, and Got. Arthus, tell of another custome

of their Virgins, if that name may be giuen them. For saith he, p 1.71 Virgines in hoc regno omuinò nulla••reperire l••cet: Puellae eni•• emues statim à pueritia sua medicamentū quoddam vsurpant, quo muliebria disten duntur & apertae continontur: idque propter globul••s quos in virg••••s vir•• gestant: illis enim admittendis virgines arctiores nullo modo sufficerent. If a man be bankerupt the Creditor may sell his wife and Children. Their money is called Gan∣za, and is made of Copper and Leade, which euery man may stampe that will. Gold and Siluer is marchandise and not money. The tides of the Sea betweene Martauan and Pegu by Caesar Fredericke q 1.72 are reputed the greatest wonder which he saw in his trauels: being so violent, that the ayre is filled with noise, and the earth quaketh at the approch of this watery element, shooting the botes that passe therewith as ar∣rowes, which at a high water they suffer not to anker in the Chanell, which would betray them to the deuouring iawes of the returning tide, but draw them toward some banke, where they rest in the ebbe on dry land, as high from the Chanels bot∣tome as any house top. And if they arriue not at their certaine Stations, they must backe againe whence they came, no place else being able to secure them. And when it encreaseth againe, it giueth them three calls or salutations: the first waue washeth ouer the barke from Stemme to sterne: the second, is not so furious: the third, raiseth the Anker. In Negrais in Pegu r 1.73 diuers people dwell in boates which they call Paroes; the country being full of Riuers, in which they goe too and fro with their Families: as strange is the dwelling here on the land; their houses being set on high Posts, and their going vp on Ladders for feare of Tygers. From hence to Pegu, is ten daies iourney by the Riuers, in which way is Cosmon and Medon, where their markets (are as their dwellings) vpon the water in Boates, with a great Sombrero, like a Cart-wheele, to keepe off the Sunne, made of Coco-Leaues.

CHAP. IIII.

Of the Religion in Pegu, and the Countrey thereunto subiect.

THeir Varellaes or Idoll-Temples in the Kingdome of Pegu are many. a 1.74 They are made round like a Sugar-Loafe or a Bell: some are as high as a Church or a reasonable Steeple, very broad beneath: some a quarter of a mile in compasse: In the making of them, they consume many Sugar-Canes with which they couer them from the top to the bottom. Within, they be all earth, done about with stone. They spend thereon much Gold, for they be all guilded aloft, and many of them from the top to the bot∣tome: and euery ten or twelue yeares, they must be new gilded, because the raine consumeth off the Gold, for they stand open abroad. Were it not for this vaine custome, Golde would heere be good-cheape. About two daies iourney from Pegu, there is a Varelle, b 1.75 or Pagode, which is the Pilgrimage of the Pegues. It is called Dogonne, and is of wonderfull bignes, and all gilded from the foote to the top. This house is fifty fiue paces in length, and hath in it three Iles or Walkes, and forty great Pillars gilded, which stand betweene them. It is gilded with golde within and without. There are houses ve∣ry faire round about for the Pilgrims to lie in: and many goodly houses for the Talli∣poies to preach in, which are full of images both of men & women all ouer gilded; I sup∣pose it the fairest place in the world. It standeth very high, and there are foure waies to it, which all along are set with Trees of Fruits in such wise, that a man may goe in the shade aboue two miles in length. And when their Feast-day is, a man can hardly passe by water or by Land for the great prease of people, which resort thither from all places of the kingdome. There are on the shore of Dogon two Statues, which from the head downeward represent yongmen, but haue the faces of Diuels, and two winges on their backes. In Pegu there is a Varelle or Temple, like to this, which the King frequented to doe his holies therein, mounting vp Staires

at the foote whereof were two Tigres gaping wide, seeming as if they had beene aliue. Besides the many Magazins (or Treasuries full of Treasure) which the late Bramen King had, hee had neere vnto the palace a Court walled with stone, the gates whereof were open euery day. Within this Court are foure guilded houses co∣uered with Leade: and in euery of them certaine Idols of great value. In the first house was a great Statue of Gold, and on his head a crowne of Gold; beset with rare Ru∣bies, and Sapphires, and about him foure little children of Gold. In the second house is another of Siluer, as high as an house, set as it were sitting on heapes of money, crowned, his foote is as long as a man. In the third house there is the like Idol of brasse, and in the fourth, of Ganza, (which is their money mettall, tempred of Leade and Copper) In another Court not farre from this, stand foure other Colosses, or huge ima∣ges of Copper, in houses gilded faire, as they are themselues, saue the head. Balby c 1.76 tels of fiue made of Ganza, so monstrous, that the toes of their feete were as bigge as a man, and fitting crosse-legged were yet as high as one could hurle a stone, and were all gilded. Fernandes d 1.77 relateth of threescore and seuen Images of Gold, richly ador∣ned with Iewels, and three hundred threescore and six Combalengas or Gourds of Gold, molten by the Kings Father, each weighing a hundred and fourescore pound; besides his other treasures; to conceale which hee slew two hundred Eunuches his attendants.

Their Tallipoies, e 1.78 before they take orders, goe to schoole, till they bee twenty yeares olde or more: then they come before a Tallipoie, appointed for that purpose, whom they call Rowli. Hee (as cheefe and most learned) examineth them many times, whether they will leaue their friends, and the company of all women, and take vpon them the habit of a Talipoy. If hee be content, then he rideth vpon an horse about the streetes, very richly apparelled, with Drummes and pipes to shew that hee leaueth the riches of the world to be a Tallipoie. In few daies after, hee is car∣ried vpon a thing like an horslitter, which they call a Serion vpon ten or twelue mens shoulders, in apparell of a Tallipoy, with Pipes and Drummes and many Tal∣lipoies with him and all his friends: which accompany him to his house, standing without the towne, and there leaue him. Euery one of them hath his house which is very little) set vpon six or eight postes, to which they ascend on a Ladder of twelue or fourteene steppes. These houses are commonly by the high-waies side, and among the Trees, and in the Woods. They goe stangely apparelled with one Camboline or thinne cloth next to their body, of a browne colour; another, of yellow, doubled many times vpon their shoulders. These two be girded to them with a broad girdle: and they haue a skinne of Leather hanging on a string about their neckes, whereon they sit bare-headed, and bare-footed, with their right armes bare, and a broad Sombrero or shadow in their hands to defend them in Summer, from the Sunne, and in Winter, from the Raine.

They goe with a great pot made of wood or fine Earth, and conered, tied with a broad girdle vpon their shoulder, which commeth vnder their arme: wherewith they goe to begge their victuals which they eate, which is Rice, Fish, and Hearbes. They demaund nothing, but come to the doore, and the people presently doe giue them one thing or other: they put altogether in their pot. They keepe their Feasts by the Moone: and at a new Moone is their most solemne Feast: and then the people send Rice and other things to that Kiack or Church, of which they be: and there all the Tallipoies of that Church meete and eate that which is sent them. They preach against all abuses, and many resort vnto them. When they enter in∣to their Kiack at the doore there is a great iarre of water, with a Cocke or a Ladle in it, and there they wash their feete, and then enter in, lifting vp their hands to their heads, first to their Preacher, and then to the Sunne, and so sit downe. When the Tallipoies preach, many of the people carry them gifts into the pulpit, where they sit & preach. And there is one which sitteth by them to take that which the people bring, which is diuided among them. They haue none other ceremonies nor seruice that I could see but onely preaching.

Boterus f 1.79 saith, that they hold an innumerable multitude of worlds successiue∣ly one after another, and also innumerable number of Gods: but not all at once. They imagine that fiue haue gouerned this present world, whereof foure are passed aboue two hundred yeares agoe. Now they are without a God, and expect the fift many ages hereafter: after whose death, they conceiue that the world shall perish by fire, and then another world shall follow, and other Gods to rule it. They reckon likewise in the number of their Gods certaine men, which yet haue first passed into fishes, beasts, and birds of all sorts. After death they beleeue three places, one of pleasure; (like the Mahumetane Paradise) another of torment; the third, of annihilation, which they call Niba. The soules after their phantasie abide in the two former places, whence they returne so often into this life till at last they be holden worthy that Niba. He addeth, that they haue Couents, or Colledges of Priests, which liue three hundred together, or more in one place, haue no vse of women, are harbourers of strangers, and liue some of almes, some of rents. They haue like Nun∣ries also for the women. There is supposed to be in one Idol-sanctuarie (whereof they haue many) 120000. Idols. They fast thirty dayes in the yeare: in which they eate nothing till night. They are of opinion, that he which in this world robbeth another man shall in the next world be his seruant for recompence. They hold it a sinne also to kill a liuing creature, although this bee not strictly obserued amongst them. Some Iewes are of opinion that this people descended of those Israelites vvhich Solomon sent to Ophir, which they place in this Kingdom. g 1.80 But the Peguans themselues ascribe their originall to a dogge, and a China-woman, which escaped ship∣wracke.

The Diuell is highly worshipped of these Pegusians, h 1.81 to whom they erect a state∣ly Altar, and adorne it with varietie of flowers, and meates of all sorts, so to see and feede him that hee should not hurt them. This is principally done when they are sicke: for then they make vowes, and build Altars, which they couer with clothes and flow∣ers. They entertaine him also with diuersitie of musicke, and appoint him a Priest whom they call the Deuils Father, which procureth his rites and musicke. Some, as soone as they arise from their beds, bring a basket of rice, and meates, and a burning Torch in their hands, running vp and down in the streets, openly professing to feede the diuel to preuent harme from them that day. And if dogges follow them, they hold them to be sent of the Diuell to deuoure those meates in his name. Some will not eate, till they haue first cast something behinde their backes to the Diuell. And in the country-villages some of the richer inhabitants leaue their houses furnished with store of foode three moneths space to be inhabited of him, keeping meane while in the fieldes: that so the other nine monethes they may be out of his danger. And howsoeuer the Talo∣pois preach against this diuellish deuotion, yet they cannot reclaime the people. The Talipoies euery Monday, arise early, and by the ringing of a Bason call together the people to their Sermons, which are of Iustice to man, but nothing of Religion to God. They wash themselues often, i 1.82 and the water, wherewith they are washed, the people account holy, and reserue it for their drinke.

They haue many feasts very solemnely obserued. k 1.83 One Feast (called Sapan Giachie) is kept twelue leagues from the Citie: whither the King rides in a triumphall Chariot, with his Queene in exceeding pompe, his Nobles attending. Another l 1.84 is kept in Pegu, against which day all the Courtiers prouide them certaine pillars or I∣mages of diuers formes, kept closely, that none may see what others haue prouided, till the day. These are made of Indian Reedes, carued and guilded, and on the feastinall presented to the King, who praiseth the most artificiall of them. All that night huge lights of waxe are burnt in honour of their Idol, whose Feast it is, that all may see to haue accesse to him, to which end the Citie-Gates are left open. But none may approch vnto him empty-handed. They haue m 1.85 a Feast of watering celebrated in the olde Citie, where the King, Queene, and his Children, with Rose-water sprinkle one another. And all the Captaines likewise besprinkle each other, that they seeme as wet as if they came out of a Riuer. It is said of the last Kings father, that when the people

were thus washing, hee would send amongst them an Elephant, which slew many of them, whereat he laughed; the people lamented. An other feast n 1.86 they haue, where∣in they haue a triall of their shippes, which can saile best: this feast lasteth a month: A fift feast o 1.87 is called Gia••••noseg••enon, in honour of a certaine Idoll; they haue many o∣ther feasts, but these the most solemne. Antony Correa, a Portugall, concluding a league with the King of Pegu, the Kings Deputy caused the articles of accord, writ∣ten in Portugall and Pegu languages with golden letters, to be read aloude, and then rent the scrole, and with a few leaues of an odoriferous tree, caused the same to bee burned to ashes, vpon which hee layed both hands of the Priest, who in the name of the King, sware to those Articles. These things being done with great attention and silence, Correa. loath in a superstitious fancie, to defile Holle Writ, with confirmati∣on of an oath to a Gentile, sware on a Booke of amorous Sonnets, to keepe inuiola∣ble the said Articles.

In the yeare of our Lord 1585. the King of Aua rebelling, (as is before shewed) the King of Pegu, by single combate, slew the traitor. The fight was on Elephants, in which the Pegusians Elephant, and the Auan Prince, died. The liuing Elephant was preferred to the place of the former; but in fifteene dayes space (let the beastlinesse of men imitate the humanity of a beast) he sorrowed so p 1.88 for his Maister, that nothing might comfort him. And although hee had continually two seruants attending him, and telling him of his amended estate vnder a mightier maister, yet would hee scarce cease to weepe, or beginne to eate, till his fifteene dayes exequies were finished.

Bomferrus a Franciscan spent three yeares in learning the Pegu's language, and mysteries, that he might preach the Christian Religion amongst them, but was soone forced to giue ouer and returne into India. For they could not endure to heare anie better knowledge then they had.

Crocodiles and Ap••s q 1.89 are accounted holy and sacred creatures, for which cause Apes multiply exceedingly; none taking them, except for the vse of their Varelles or Temples, where they tie them, and keepe them with diligent réspect. And though the Crocodiles in the Towne-ditch deuoure men daily, yet in a blinde zeale they will drinke no other water, and account their soules certainely saued, whose bodies are thus certainely lost and deuoured of those beasts, which sometimes are thirtie foote in length.

The Kings, subiect to the King of Pegu, did their homage, and presented themselues before him, kneeling, yea they not onely kneeled to him, but to his white Elephants also. When the King dieth, they make two shippes with golden couers, and betwixt them erect a golden Theater; in which they place the corpse, applying thereto muske, and the most sweet woods, with other things: and so set forth the same to Sea, setting that Theater or Pagcant on fire. In one of the shippes are Talapoies, which sing till they thinke the body consumed to ashes. Then do they make a masse or lumpe of these ashes and milke, and commit the same to Sea in the hauen of Sirian at an ebbing wa∣ter: the bones which remaine they carry to an other place, and there erecting a Chap∣pell, doe bury the same therein. After this they returne to the pallace, and, according to the accustomed rites, inaugurate the new King. The father of that King (whose tragedie yee haue heard) had his bones buried in Dogon.

In Dagin or Dacin, as certaine Merchants at Martaban told our Author r 1.90 That if the King be in loue with a maide, he asketh her fathers consent, which yet few will graunt, because he is still tied to maintaine his daughter; the King allowing no expen∣ses to his wife. In some places of that kingdome are men-eaters, called Batacchi, which when their parents grow olde, kill them, and eate them as great dainties. When the King hath condemned a man for some crime, these are his executioners, who in the presence of the king cut off his head, hands and feete, and adding pepper and salt, eate his flesh raw. He is called the king of Assi, and is of great power, hath many ships, much pepper, and is a sworne enemy to the Portugalls, working all the euill he can to Malacca. If the father knoweth the sonne to be guilty (or the sonne the father) of some grieuous crime, he may slay him, but must after giue account to the king; and if he al∣low

the fact, all is will; otherwise he is liable to punishment.

In Iamahey or Iangoma (fiue and twenty daies iourney from Pegu) when the peo∣ple be sicke, they make a vow, to offer meate vnto the deuil, if they escape: and when they be recouered, they make a banquet, with many pipes, and drummes, and many other Instruments, and dauncing all the night. Their friends bring them presents, Cocos, figges, Arrecaes, and other fruits; and with great dancing and reioycing, they offer to the deuill, and say, they giue the deuill to eate, and driue him out, and to this end in their dancing they crie and hollow very lowd. Likewise, when they be sicke, a Tallipoy or two, euery night doth sit by them, and sing, to please the deuill, that he should not hurt them. When one is dead, he is carried vpon a great frame, made like a Tower, with a couering all gilded, made of canes, carried by foureteene or sixteene men, with great minstrel sie to a place out of the Towne, and there is burned. Hee is accompanied with all his friends and neighbours, all men: and they giue to the Tallipoies, or Priests, many mattes and cloth: and then returne to the house, where they feast it two dayes: which being expired, the women accompany the wife to the place where he was burned, and there spend a while in mourning: then doe they gather the peeces of bones, which be left vnburned, and burie them, and then returne to their houses. The neere of kindred doe also shaue their heads, both men and women.

CHAP. V.

Of Bengala, and the parts adioyning.

THe kingdome of Bengala a 1.91 is very large, and hath of coast one and twenty leagues, and as much within land. The riuer Chaberis (which some call Guenga, and thinke to be the ancient Ganges) watereth it: It is plentifull in rice, wheate, sugar, ginger, long pepper, cotton and silke: and enioyeth a very wholesome ayre. The inhabitants neare the shore, are (for the most part) Mahumetans, and so also was the king, before the great Mogore (one likewise of his owne Sect) conquered him. Gouro the seate royall, and Bengala are faire cities. Of this the Gulfe, sometimes called Gangeti∣cus, now beareth name Golfo di Bengala. Chatigan is also reckoned amongst their Cities. They b 1.92 are a most subtile and wicked people, and are esteemed the worst slaues of all India: for that they are all theeues; and the women, whoores; although this fault is common through all India, no place excepted. They haue a custome, neuer to dresse or seeth meate twice in one pot, but haue euery time a new one. Whensoeuer they are found in adultery, they haue their c 1.93 noses cut off, and are thence forwards nar∣rowly looked to, that they keepe not each others company. The Portugalles haue here Porto grande, and Porto Pequino, but without forts and gouernment; euerie man liuing after his owne lust: and for the most part, they are such as dare not stay in their places of better gouernement, for some wickednesse by them committed.

In Bengala are found great numbers of Abadas or Rhinocerotes, whose horn (grow∣ing out of his snowt) teeth, flesh, bloud, clawes, and whatsoeuer he hath without & within his body, is good against poyson, and is much accounted of throughout all India. The skinne d 1.94 vpon the vpper part of this beast, is all wrinckled, as if hee were armed with shields. It is a great enemy of the Elephant. Some thinke that this is the right Vnicorne, because as yet there is no other by late trauellers found, but one∣ly by heare-say. Onely Ludonicus Vertomannus e 1.95 saith he sawe a couple of those true Vnicornes at Mecca; one whereof had a horse of three cubits, being of the bignes of a colt of two yeres and a halfe old; the other was much lesse: both sent to the Sul∣tan of Mecca, for a rare present out of Aethiopia. Gesner in his Booke of Foure-foo∣ted Beasts, f 1.96 citeth this testimony, and some others, whereby he perswadeth, that there are diuers sorts of these Vnicornes: But it cannot seeme otherwise then strange, that

in this last hundred of yeares. Wherein the world hath vnveiled her face more then e∣uer before; none of credite (that I haue read) hath affirmed himselfe to haue seene this Vnicorne, but in picture. That which is reported of their vertue against poyson, pro∣ceedeth from the hearbes which Bengala yeeldeth: for in other places they are not heere the price of these. There are heere also certaine wilde Goats, whose hornes are in account against venome: as I my selfe (saith Linschoten) haue proued.

The kings g 1.97 of Bengala, in times past, were chosen of the Abassine or Aethiopian slaues, as the Soldans of Cairo were sometime of the Circassian Mamalukes. North∣wards of Bengala lieth the kingdome of Arracan. The great Can subdued these parts and the kingdome of Mien, about the yeare 1272, while M••••cus Paulus liued there. Arracam, Chandican, and Syripur are by Fernandez placed in Bengala, as so many kingdoms: Patane or Patenau by Frederike and Fitch reckoned to an other Bengalan kingdome: which our Countreyman Maister Fitch calleth the kingdom of Gouren: so that vnder this name Bengala are comprehended many Seigniories; all, or the most part now subiect to the Mogor.

Our Mappes seeme not to describe the riuer Ganges (so will we here terme it with Ortellius, Castaldus, Barrius, and all our later Trauellers, both Merchants and Iesuits) according to the due course thereof. For Chaberis they bring from the North encli∣ning to the East, Guenga from the West; but Maister Fitch, which continued fiue mo∣neths in passing downe first in Iamena from Agra, which falleth into Ganges, and then in Ganges it selfe to Bengala (although hee confesseth it may be done in shorter time) saith it commeth from the North-west, and runneth East into the Sea. Some call Chaberis, Ganges; and some hold Guenga to be Ganges; and some make but one riuer of them both: and hence may happly arise in part, that seeking of Ganges so farre off.

There is in Ganges h 1.98 a place called Gongasagie, that is, the entry of the Sea, in which are many fishes called Sea-dogges. They which are weary of this world, and desire to haue a quicke passage to Paradise, cast in themselues here to be deuoured of these fishes; perswading themselues, that the next and readiest way thither, is by their jawes.

Ganges i 1.99 ouerflowing his bankes, in times past drowned many villages, which so remayne; and hath changed his wonted Channell: the cause that Tanda (a Citie of trafficke) standeth now a league from the riuer. It watereth a fruitfull Countrey and populous, and (as the Oceans high Collector) receiueth into him many riuers by the way, some no lesle then it selfe, so that in the time of raine, you can not see from the one side of Ganges to the other. The superstitious opinion conceiued, in those parts, of this riuer, appeareth by the reports of all. k 1.100 Emanuel Pinner at Cambaia obserued many to resort thither on pilgrimage, sometime out of that Citie foure thousand; and was told by the Gouernor of Bengala vnder the Mogor then at Lahor, that there came thither sometime three hundred thousand or foure hundred thousand Pilgrims. And addeth, That not long before his comming to Cambaia there assembled there, to this deuout iourney, fiftie thousand people. Happy they esteeme that man which wa∣sheth himselfe therein, and secure of saluation, if at the point of death he may drinke of this water. l 1.101 Hee conferred with one Gedacham, a great man, which had beene on this holy voyage, and had there weighed his mother three times; first, by her weight in siluer; secondly, in golde; thirdly, in pearles, all which hee gaue vnto the poore. m 1.102 A brother of his, called Ra••, being to goe to the great Mogore, offered one hundred and fiftie thousand Pardawos that his Pagodes or Idoles should send him good successe. They make an Image also to this riuer, whereunto they doe diuine honour. The king of Calecut and the other kings of Malabar keep a solemne feast e∣uery twelue yeares, in honour of this riuer; because that long since a certaine Bra∣mene (falsely accused) fled vnto Ganges, and there led an austere life twelue yeres; worshipping that Streame and his Idoll, to whom when he purposed to return home, after those twelue yeares expired, that Image of Ganges appeared, and said, that on the last day of February hee would appeare in a riuer of his owne Countrey, and cause

the waters thereof to arise, and runne backeward in witnesse of his innocencie, and bade him assemble all the Lords of Malabar to the sight, which accordingly came to passe, and the memory thereof is by this Feast solemnized.

Bannaras n 1.103 is a great Towne on Ganges, to which the Gentiles out of farre coun∣tries come on pilgrimage. The men are shauen all but the crowne. Alongst the wa∣ter-side are many faire houses, in which stand Images of euill fauour, made of stone, and wood, like leopards, lions, monkeis, men, women, peacockes, and deuills, with foure armes and hands, sitting close-legged, and holding somewhat in their hands. There are diuers old men, which on places of earth, made for the purpose, sit praying, and they glue the people (which by breake of day, and before, come out of the towne, to wash themselues in Ganges) three or foure strawes, which they take, and hold them betweene their fingers where they wash themselues: & some sit to mark them in the foreheads, and they haue in a cloth a litle rice, barly, or mony, which they giue to these old men. After that, they go to diuers of their images, and giue them of their sacrifi∣ces, those old men in the meane while praying, which maketh all holy. They haue one idoll called Ada, with foure hands and clawes. On certaine great carued stones also they poure water, rice, wheat &c. They haue a great place like a wel, with steps to goe down, wherein the water standeth foule, and stinketh by reason of those many flo∣wers, which they continually throw thereinto. Many people are alwaies therein with imagination of pardon for their sins, because God (as they blaspheme) washed himself therein. They gather vp the sand in the botome, as a holy relike. They pray not but in the water, and wash themselues ouer head, lading vp water with both their hands, and turne themselues about, and then drinke a little of the water three times, after which they goe to their Gods in their houses. Some of them will wash a place which is their length, and then will pray vpon the earth, with their armes and legs at length out, and will rise vp and lie downe, and kisse the ground twenty or thirtie times, but will not stirre their right foote. Some vse fifteene or sixteene pots, little and great, rin∣ging a bell while they make their mixtures ten or twelue times; and make a circle of water about their pots, and pray: others sitting by, one of which reacheth them their pots. They say ouer these pots diuers things many times, which done, they go to their gods and strew their sacrifices, which they thinke are very holy, and marke many of them which sit by in the foreheads, esteemed as a great gift. There come fiftie, and sometime a hundred together, to this Well, and to these Idoles.

About their Idolls in some houses sitteth one in warme weather to blow the wind with a fan vpon them. And when they see any company comming, they ring a little bell, and many giue them their almes. None of these idolles haue a good face. Some are blacke, and haue clawes of brasse; and some ride on peacockes or other fowles. One there is alwayes attended with his fan, to make winde, which (they say) giueth them all things, both food and rayment. Heere some be burned to ashes, some scor∣ched in the fire, and throwne into the water, when they are dead: the Foxes presently eate them. The wiues do burne with their husbands when they die: if they will not, their heads be shauen, and neuer any account is made of them after. If a man or wo∣man be sicke, and like to die, they will lay him before their idolles all night: and that shall mend or end him. And if he do not mend, that night his friends will come and fit a little with him, and cry, and after will carry him to the waters side, and set him vpon a little raft made of reeds, and so let him go downe the riuer. The chiefe idols are very euill-fauoured, their mouthes monstrous, their eares gilded, and full of jewelles, their teeth and eyes of gold, siluer, glasse, coloured blacke, with Lampes continually burning before them. Into their houses or Temples you may not enter, with your shooes on. When the scorched Indians are throwne into Ganges, the men swim with their faces downewards, the women with their faces vpwards; which I had thought they had by some meanes caused, but they denied it. The people goe all naked, with a little cloth about their middle. Their women are exceedingly on their necks, armes, and eares, decked with rings of siluer, copper, tin, and iuory hoopes; they are marked with a great spot of red in their foreheads, and a stroke of red vp to the crowne, and so

it runneth three wayes. Their marriages are in this sort: o 1.104 The man and the woman come to the water side, where standeth a Bramane or Priest, with a Cow and a Calfe, or a Cow with Calfe: These all goe into the water together, the Bramane holding a white cloth of foure yards long, and a basket crosse bound with diuerse things in it. This cloth he laieth vpon the backe of the Cow. And then he taketh the Cow by the taile and saith certaine words. She hath a copper or a brasse pot-ful-of water. The man holdeth his hand by the Bramans hand, and the wiues hand by her husbands, and all haue the Cow by the taile. Then they poure water out of the pot vpon the Cowes taile, which runneth through all their hands, and they lade vp water with their hands, and then the Bramane tieth their clothes together. After this they goe round about the Cowe and Calfe, and giue somewhat to the poore there attending, leauing the Cow and Calfe for the Bramans vse, and offer to diuers of their Idolls money, then ly∣ing downe vpon the ground, they kisse it diuers times, and goe their way. Betweene this and Patenaw are diuers theeues, like the Arabians, without certaine abode.

Patenaw was sometime a kingdome, now subiect to the Mogore. The women here are so decked with siluer and copper, that it is strange to see, and by reason of such rings vpon their toes, they can weare no shooes. Heere I saw a dissembling Prophet which sate vpon an horse in the market-place, and made as though he slept, and many of the people came and touched his feete with their hands, and then kissed their hands. They tooke him for a great man, but I saw he was a lazie lubber: and there I left him sleeping. The people here are great praters & dissemblers. As I came from Agra down the riuer Iemena, I saw also many naked beggets, of which the people make great ac∣count; they call them Schesche. Heere I saw one, which was a monster among the rest, wearing nothing on him, with a long beard, the haire of his head couering his pri∣uities. The nailes of some of his fingers were two inches long: for hee would cut no∣thing from him p 1.105 Neither would he speake, but was accompanied with eight or ten which spake for him. When any man spake to him, hee would lay his hand vpon his breast, and bow himselfe, but speake he would not to the King.

In those parts they had many strange ceremonies. Their Bramans or Priests come to the water, and haue a string about their neckes made with great ceremonies, and lade vp water with both their hands, and turne the string first with their armes within, and then one arme after the other out. Heere also about Iemena, the Gentiles will eate no flesh, nor kill any thing. They pray in the water naked, and dresse their meat and eate it naked: and for their penance they lie flat vpon the earth, and rise vp and turne themselues about thirtie or forty times, and vse to heaue vp their hands to the Sunne, and to kisse the earth, with their armes and legs stretched out along, their right leg being alwayes before the left. Euery time they lie downe, they score it with their fingers, to know when their stint is ended. The Bramanes marke themselues in the foreheads, cares, and throats, with a kinde of yellow geare which they grinde; euerie morning they doe it. And they haue some old men which go in the streets with a box of yellow powlder, and marke them which they meet on their heads and neckes. And their wiues doe come, ten, twenty and thirty together to the water side, singing, and there doe wash themselues, and vse their ceremonies, and marke themselues on the foreheads and faces, and carry some with them, and so depart singing. Their daugh∣ters be married, at, or before the age of ten yeares. The men may haue seuen wiues. They are a crafty people, worse then the Iewes.

I went q 1.106 from Bengala into the Countrey of Couche, which lieth fiue and twentie dayes iourney North-wards from Tanda. The King was a Gentile, named Suckel Counse: his Countrey is great, and lieth not farre from Cauchin-China. All the Countrey is set with canes made sharpe at both ends, and driuen into the earth; and they can let in the water, and drowne the Countrey knee-deepe. In time of war they poyson all the waters. The people haue eares which be maruellous great, of a span long, which they draw out in length by deuises when they be young. They are all Gentiles, and will kill nothing, They haue Hospitalls for sheepe, dogs, goates, cats, birds, and all other liuing creatures. When they be old and lame, they keep them till

they die. If a man catch or buy any quicke thing in other places, and bring it thither, they will giue him money for it, or other victualles, and keepe it in their Hospitalles, or let it goe. They will giue meate to the Antes. Their small mony is Almonds, which oftentimes they eate. We passed through the Countrey of Gouren, where we found but few villages, and almost all wildernesse, and sawe many buffes, swine, and deete: grasse longer then a man, and very many Tygers. Satagam is a faire Citie, for a city of Moores, and very plentifull. In Bengala such is the estimation of Ganges, that they will fetch of it a great way off, though they haue good water neere: & if they haue not sufficient to drinke, they will sprinkle a little on them, and then they are well. From Satagam I trauelled by the Countrey of the King of Tippaia, with whom the Mogore hath continuall warre. The Mogores, which be of the kingdome of Recon and Rame, be stronger then this King of Tippaia. Foure dayes iourney from Cou∣che is Botanter, and the citty Bettia: the King is called Dermaine the people are tall and strong: the Countrey great, three moneths iourney, and hath in i•• high moun∣taines, one of which a man may see, six dayes iourney off: Vpon these mountaines are people with eares of a span long; otherwise they account them Apes. Hither re∣sort many merchants out of China and Tartaria. From Charigan in Bengala I went to Bacola, the king whereof is a Gentile; thence to Senepare, and after, to Simer∣gan, where they will eate no flesh, nor kill no beast; and thence to Negrais in Pegu and Cosmin. Thus farre hath our Countrey-man led vs in the view of so many super∣stitions of these Bengalans: and their Northerly neighbours.

The Bengalans r 1.107 haue a tradition or fable amongst them, That this riuer commeth out of Paradise, which was proued by one of their kings, who sent men vp the stream till they came to a pleasant aire, still water, and fragrant earth, and could rowe no fur∣ther. Hence happly grew this conceit, That this water should wash away sinne, and that without it they cannot be saued. This riuer hath in it Crocodiles, which by wa∣ter are no lesse daungerous then the Tygers by land, and both will assault men in their shippes. There is also a little small beast, which by his barking maketh the Tiger to runne away.

The king of Chandecan s 1.108 caused a Iesuite to rehea••se the Decalogue: who when he reproued those Indians for their polytheisme, worshipping so many Pagodes; He said, that they obserued them but as, among them, their Saints were worshipped: to whom how sauoury the Iesuites distinction of •••••• and •••••• was for his satisfaction, I leaue to the Readers iudgement. This king, and the others of Bacala and Arracan haue admitted the Iesuites into their Countries, and most of these Indian Nations.

In that part of Botanter, which is next to Lahor and the Mogor, the people t 1.109 are white, and Gentiles. Their garments are close girt to them, that a wrinckle or pleit is not to be seene, which they neuer put off, no not when they sleepe, as long as they are able to hang on: their head-attire is like a sugar loafe, sharpe at the toppe. They neuer wash their hands, left, say they, so pure a creature should be defiled. They haue but one wife; and when they haue two or three children, they liue as brother and si∣ster. Widowers and widowes may not marry a second time. They haue no Idolles nor townes, nor king, in those parts of Bottanter. They haue their Soothsayers, which they aske counsell of. When any is dead, they resort vnto these Wisards, to knowe what is to be done with their dead. They search their Bookes; and as they say the word, they burne them, or bury them, or eate them, although they vsually feede not on mans flesh. They also vse dead mens skulls instead of dishes, as in Thebet we haue obserued the like custome. They are liberall Almes-giuers.

CHAP. VI.

Of the Great Mogor.

THe Great Mogor (according to Boterus) hath vnder his subiection se∣uen and fortie Kingdomes, which lye betweene Indus and Ganges on the East and West, and betwixt Imaus and the Ocean. He is called of the people the Great Mogor, for the same cause that the Ottoman-Turkes are called Great. The stile of him that was King a 1.110 when the Iesuites imparted to vs these relations, was Mahumeth Zelabdi•• E∣••hebar, King Mogor. His descent is from Tamerlan (worthily called Great) from whome he is reckoned the eight. His father was Emmanpa••da (as the Iesuites re∣port) which being driuen to great straits by the Parthians, or Tartars, was driuen to aske aid of the Sophi. or Persian King; which he obtained, with condition of submit∣ting himselfe to the Persian Religion. The Mogores speake the Turkish Language. The Empire of this Mogore is exceeding great, containing the Countries of Bengala, Cambaia, Mendao, and others, comprehended by some vnder the name of Industan. This Mendao is said to be tenne Leagues in circuit, and that it cost the Mogor twelue yeares siege. Agra and Fatipore are two Cities in his dominion, great, and full of peo∣ple, much exceeding London; and the ••hole space betweene is as a continuall popu∣lous Market. Many Kings he hath conquered, and many haue submitted themselues and their States voluntarily to his subiection. Twentie Gentile Kings are numbred b 1.111 in his Court, which attend him, equalling the King of Calecut in power. Many others pay him tribute. Eleuen great Riuers runne through his dominions; Taphi, Har••ada, Chambel, Iamena, Ganges: The other six are Indus, or Sch••••d (as they call it) and Ca∣tamul, Cebcha, Ray, Chenao, Reb••th, tributaries to Indus. The whole Monarchie enui∣roneth nine hundred Leagues. King Echebar c 1.112 hath many Lords, each of which is to maintaine eight, tenne, twelue, or foureteene thousand horse in readines for the warre, besides Elephants, of which in the whole Kingdome are said to bee fiftie thousand. Himselfe can further bring of his owne into the Field fiftie thousand horse, & footmen innumerable. To those Lords he alloweth certain Prouinces for such militarie seruice: for he is Lord of all, nor hath any else possession of any thing, but at the will of the King. Once a yeare they appeare before the King, where they present a view of those their enioyned forces. Many millions of reuenue doe besides accrew vnto his coffers: yet his Port and Magnificence is not so great, as of many other Princes, either for Ap∣parrell, Diet, or the Maiestie of his Court-seruice. He cannot write or reade, but hea∣reth often the disputations of others, and Histories read before him, being of deepe iudgement, piercing wit, and wise fore-cast. In execution of Iustice hee is very disi∣gent, insomuch, that in the Citie where he resideth he heareth all causes himselfe, nei∣ther is any malefactor punished without his knowledge, himselfe giuing publike au∣dience tenne times euery day: for which purpose hee hath two wide Halls, and in them Royall Thrones, where he is attended with eight Counsellors, besides No∣taries.

This King detesteth the Mahumetane Sect, which, as you heard, his father embra∣ced for his aduantage; and therefore hath ouerthrowne their Moschees in his King∣dome, conuerting them to Stables, and more trusteth and employeth the Gentiles in his affaires then the Moores: whereupon many of them rebelled against him, & stirred vp the Prince of Quabul, his brother, to take Armes: against whome Echebar opposed himselfe, and caused him to retire into his owne Countrie. It is vncertaine d 1.113 what Reli∣gion he is of, some affirming him to be a Moore, some a Gentile, some a Christian; some of a fourth Sect, and of none of the former. Indeede it appeareth that he wauereth, vncertaine which way of many to take, able to see the absurdities of the Arabian

and Gentile profession, and not able to beleeue the high mysteries of the Christian Faith, especially the Trinitie and Incarnation. He hath admitted the Iesuites there to preach, and would haue had them by miracle to haue proued those thinges to him, which they (elsewhere so much boasting of Miracles) wisely refused. For the deman∣ded, that the Mulla's, or Priests of the Mogores, and they, should by passing through the fire make tryall of their Faith. Hee hath many Bookes and Images, which the Christians there doe vse, and seemeth to haue great liking to them, vsing the same with great reuerence. But his Religion is the same (it seemeth) with that of Tamer∣lane his predecessour, to acknowledge one GOD, whome varietie of Sects and wor∣shippings should best content. He caused e 1.114 thirtie infants to be kept, as is said of Psammetichus King of Aegypt, setting certaine to watch and obserue, that neither their Nurses, nor any else, should speake vnto them, purposing to addict himselfe to that Religion which they should embrace, whose Language these infants, should speake; which accordingly came to passe. For as they spake no certaine Language, so is not he setled in any certaine Religion. He hath diuerse Idols sometime brought before him, among which is one of the Sunne, which early euery morning he worship∣peth. He worshipped also the Image of CHRIST, setting it on the Crowne of his head. He is addicted to a new Sect, as is said, wherein he hath his followers, which hold him for a Prophet. The profit, which they haue by his Gold, addicteth them to this new Prophet. f 1.115 He professeth to worke miracles; by the water of his feet cu∣ring diseases. Many women make vowes vnto him, either to obtaine children, or to recouer the health of their children; which if they attaine, they bring him their vow∣ed deuotions, willingly of him receiued. Hee hath three sonnes; Sciec the eldest, which is honoured with the title G••o, and called Sciecigio, that is, the Soule, or Per∣son, of Sciec: he much fauoureth the Iesuites: The second, Pahari; Dan, or Daniel is the youngest: Some call them by other names. His presents are exceeding, besides his Tributes and Customes: for in eight dayes space these gifts amounted to a million of Gold; g 1.116 and almost daily he is presented with the like, and especially in a feast which he celebrateth, called Nerosa, great gifts are offered: so that his Treasures occupie the next roome to those of China.

Touching the Superstitions of this Kingdome, thus writeth Ioannes Oranus, in his Narration of this Kingdome. h 1.117 . Not farre from the Citie Tahor is an Idoll, resembling a woman, which they call Nazar Coto, framed with two heads, and six or seuen armes, and twelue or foureteene hands, one of which brandisheth a Speare, another a Club. Hereunto resort many Pilgrims to worship, and hereof they tell many miracles; as that many cut off their Tongues, which are againe restored whole vnto them, but re∣maine mute. Some thinke our breath to be our Soule. Some affirme, That all things are the same thing. Some, that GOD onely hath a being, other things are shadowes and apparances. Some thinke all things, and some, the round Circle of the world, and some, themselues to be GOD. Almost all doe hold the commigration of soules into the bodies of Beasts. They say the World shall last foure Ages, or Worlds, whereof three are past. The first lasted seuenteene Laches (euery Laches containeth a hundred thousand yeares) and 28000 yeares. Men in that World liued tenne thousand yeares, were of great stature of bodie, and great sinceritie of minde. Thrice in this space did GOD visibly appeare on the Earth: First in forme of a Fish, that he might bring out the Booke of the Law of Brama, which one Causacar had harled into the Sea: The se∣cond time in forme of a Snayle, that he might make the Earth drie and solid: Lastly, like a Hogge, to destroy one that said he was God, or as others of them as truely say, to recouer the Earth from the Sea, which had swallowed it. The second World lasted tenne Laches, and 92006 yeares, in which men were as tall as before, and liued a thousand yeares. GOD did appeare foure times: first, in a monstrous forme, the vpper part a Lyon, the lower a Woman, to represse the pride of one which gaue out himselfe for GOD: Secondly, like a poore Bramane, to punish a proud King, that would by a new-deuised Art flee into Heauen: The third time,

to be reuenged of another King, which had slaine a poore Religious man, he came in the likenesse of a man, named Parcaram; and lastly, like one Ram, the sonne of Gio∣••orat, which had slaine Parcaram. The third World continued eight Laches, and foure thousand yeares, wherein men liued fiue hundred yeares; and GOD appeared twìce in humane likenesse. The fourth Age shall endure foure Laches, whereof are alreadie passed 4692 yeares. They say GOD will also appeare in this Age. Others imagine, that he hath alreadie appeared, and that Echebar is he. Some hold, That those tenne appearances were but creatures, which had receiued Diuine power. They themselues easily perceiue the vanitie of these Chimara's and monstrous opinions, but will not leaue them, least they should (at the same cast) loose their wealth and Super∣stition together.

In this Countrie of the Mogor they haue i 1.118 many fine Carts, carued and gilded, with two Wheeles, drawne with two little Bulls, about the bignesse of our great Dogges in England, and they will runne with any Horse, and carrie two or three men in one of those Carts. They are couered with Silke, or fine Cloth, and be in vse as our Coa∣ches in England.

By the Letters of N. Pimenta k 1.119 1600, it appeareth, that the Mogor had subdued three Indian Kings, of the Arabian Sect, Abdenagran, Idalcan, Massulapatan, and grew dreadfull to the puissant King of Narsinga, by the current of his Conquests, in that Chersonesus which trendeth to the South from Cambaia and Bengala, before mentioned.

CHAP. VII.

Of Cambaia, and the neighbouring Nations.

CAmbaia is also called Guzarat a 1.120 , containing in length, from the Riuer Bate to Circam, a Persian Region, fiue hundred myles of Sea-coast, being on other parts enuironed b 1.121 with the Kingdomes of Dulcinda and Sanga on the North; Mandao, on the East; on the West, Nauta∣cos, or the Gedrosians. The Sea and the Confines of Decan are the Southerly bounds. It hath in it, by estimation, threescore thousand Populations, or inhabited Places, watered with many streames, the chiefe whereof is Indus, which diuideth it in the middle, running from Caucasus, or Naugrocot, and af∣ter nine hundred myles iourney, with two nauigable mouthes disemboquing it selfe into the Ocean. This Countrey is very fertile, not yeelding to any other in India, in the fruites which the Earth and Trees bring forth, besides their store of Ele∣phants, Gemmes, Silke, Cotton, and such like. The people are of an Oliue-colour, and goe naked, except about their priuie parts. They eate no Flesh, but Rice, Milke, Barley, and other life-lesse creatures. The inhabitants are, for the most part. ••••••∣tiles; and so were their Kings, vntill the Mahumetane Superstitions preuailed. There are c 1.122 vp, within the Land, People called R••isbuti, which are the naturall Nobles of this Kingdome, chased by the Moores to the Mountaines, whence they make often excursions and spoyles in the Countrey, and the Cambayans pay them tribute, that they might liue in peace. Their chiefe Sea-Townes are Daman, Bandora, Curate, Ravellum, Bazuinum; and within Land, Cambaia, Madabar, Campanel, Tanaa, &c.

Cambaia hath bestowed the name on the whole Kingdome, which they call the Indian Cairo, for the excellencie thereof: it standeth three myles from Indus. The Tides here d 1.123 encrease not, as with vs, at the full, but at the decrease of the Moone they are at the highest. It is not a hundred and threescore yeares since Macham••••, a Moore, expelled the Guzarat King.

This Machamut deserueth mention for one thing, wherein the Sunne hath scarce beheld his like. He so accustomed himselfe to poysons, that no day passed wherein he tooke not some: for else he him selfe had died, sayth Barbosa, as it fareth with Am∣sian, or Opium, the vse whereof killeth such as neuer tooke it, and the difuse, such as haue. And beyond that which we reade of Mithrodates in the like practise, his Na∣ture was transformed into so venomous a habit, that if he did meane to put any of his Nobles to death, he would cause them to be set naked before him, and chewing cer∣taine Fruits in his mouth, which they call Chofolos and Tambolos, with lime made of shells, by spitting vpon him in one halfe houre, depriued him of life: if a Flye sat vpon his hand, it would presently fall off dead. Neither was e 1.124 his loue to be preferred to his hatred, or with women was his dealing lesse deadly. For he had foure thousand Con∣cubines, of whome none liued to see a second Sunne, after he had carnally knowne them. His Mustaches (or haire of his vpper lippe) was so long, that he bound it vp on his head, as women do with a haire-lace; and his beard was white, reaching to his Waste. Euery day when he arose, and when he dined, fiftie Elephants were brought into the Pallace, to doe him reuerence on their knees, accompanied with Trumpets, and other Musicke.

Caelins Rhodiginus f 1.125 mentions the like of a maid, thus nourished with poysons, her spittle (and other humours comming from her) being deadly: such also as lay with her carnally, presently dying. He cites out of Auicenna a like example of a man, whose nature, infected with a stronger venome, poysoned other venomous creatures, if any did bite him. And when a greater Serpent was brought for triall, he had by the biting thereof a two-dayes Feuer; but the Serpent died: The other did not harme him.

Mamudius, the successor of King Machamut, was a great enemie to the Portu∣galls. Badurius succeeded in State and affection, and exceeded in greatnesse and am∣bition. He inuaded g 1.126 Mandao, and Sanga, where he besieged Citor, then gouerned by a warre-like woman, which not able to hold out longer against him, fledde, and left the people in forlorne plight, who in a desperate resolution (like Sardanapalus) hea∣ping vp their Treasures, set fire thereto, and then cast themselues therein. This fire continued three dayes, and consumed threescore and tenne thousand persons.

Hence Badurius triumphantly marched against the Mogor, whome Maffaens calleth Miramudius, (it seemeth to be Echebars Grandfather, whome some h 1.127 call Baburxa, famous for his Indian victories) with an Armie of a hundred and fiftie thousand horse, whereof thirtie thousand were barded; and fiue hundred thousand footmen: of great Brazen Ordinance, a thousand; whereof foure Basiliskes were drawne (such was their weight) by so many hundred yokes of Oxen: with Shot and Powder he laded fiue hundred Waines, and as many with Gold and Siluer, to pay his souldiors. These Forces, with this prouision, might rend the Ayre with thunders, might make the Earth to shake with terrour, might drie and drinke vp Ri∣uers of water, might frame another fierie Element, of Arts inuention, but could not eyther terrifie the Mogor, or saue Badurius from a double ouerthrow, first at Doce∣ri, next at Mandoa, where the looseth his Tents and Treasures, and shauing his beard, fleeth disguised to Diu, in which, that the Portugalls might be engaged in the same Warre, he gaue them leaue to erect a Fortresse: A thing of such moment vnto them, that Iohn Botelius (confined before vnto India, for crimes obiected) thought, by being the first messenger thereof in Portugall, to purchase his libertie: whereof he might well be reputed worthie, who in a little Vessell, scarce eighteene foot long, and six wide, with vndaunted courage contemning that wide, long, & tem∣pestuous Ocean, arriued with his small companie, great newes, and greater admiration at Lisbone. Badurius after alteriug his minde, and therein entertaining a treacherous proiect against the Portugalls, coloured the same with kindnesse, and he (which feared all i 1.128 men no lesse thē he was feared as guiltie to his own tyrannie, which somtime made Dionisins of a King a Barber, & now this, a King of others, & his own Cook, trusting no

man to dresse his meat) aduentured to visit the Portugall Viceroy in his shippes, pro∣fessing great friendship with great dissimulation, and by a meane Mariner, at his re∣turne, was slaine; whereupon the whole Island submitted it selfe to the Portugall yoke. And because we haue in this Chapter mentioned so many wonders, let this also haue place among (if not aboue) the rest, which presently happened k 1.129 Whiles the Portugals were busie in their buildings, a certaine Bengalan l 1.130 came to the Go∣uernour, which had liued, as he affirmed, three hundred thirtie fiue yeares. The olde men of the Countrey testified, That they had heard their ancestors speake of his great age, and himselfe had a sonne fourescore and tenne yeares old, and not at all booke∣learned, yet was a speaking Chronicle of those passed times. His teeth had sometimes fallen out, others growing in their places; and his beard, after it had beene very hoa∣rie, by degrees returned into his former blacknesse. About a hundred yeares before this time he had altered his Pagan Religion into the Arabian or Moorish. For this his miraculous age, the Sultans of Cambaia had allowed him a stipend to liue on, the continuance of which he now sought, and did obtaine of the Portugalls.

Mamudius, Successour to Badurius, sought with all his forces to driue these new Lords out of Diu, as Solyman had done before, by a Nauie and Armie sent thither, but both in vaine: of which Warres, Damianus à Goes m 1.131 hath written diuers Commen∣taries. But this whole Countrey is now subiect to the Mogor. It was, in Alex∣anders time, peopled by the Massani, Sodrae, or Sabracae, Praestae, and Sangada, as Ortelins hath placed them, where Alexander (as in diuerse other places hee had done) erected a Citie of his owne name, called Alexandria. Daman, another Key of this Bay, and entrance of the Riuer Indus into the Sea, fell to the Portugalls share.

The Land of Cambaia n 1.132 is the fruitfullest in all India, which causeth great trafficke of Indians, Portugalls, Persians, Arabians, Armenians, &c. The G••zarates, or Cam∣baians, are the subtillest Marchants in all India. They haue o 1.133 amongst them many Histories of Darius and Alexander, which sometime were Lords of this Indian Pro∣uince. The Portugalls p 1.134 haue at diuerse times conquered diuerse of the chiefe Townes in this Kingdome, some whereof they keepe still. There are women in Diu, which by art dye their teeth blacke, esteeming themselues so much more beautifull, and therefore goe with their lippes open, to shew the blacknesse of their teeth. When a Cambayan dieth, they burne his bodie, and distribute the ashes vnto the foure Ele∣ments (of which man consisteth,) The wiues are burned with their husbands, being addressed thereunto in pompous attyre.

Six Leagues from Decan is a Hill, out of which the Diamond is taken. This Hill is kept with a Garrison, and walled about. A little from Ciauli is an old Temple (suppo∣sed to be built by Alexander the Great) adorned with Imagerie, now the habitation of Battes. Beneath it is a Riuer so deepe, that none haue yet found the bottome.

Garcius ab Horto thus writeth q 1.135 , That about three hundred yeares before his time, a mightie King in the Kingdome of Dely, depriued the Gentiles of the Kingdome of Balaguate. At the same time the Moores dispossessed the Reisbuti of Cambaya. These Reisbuti in Cambaya (once the Naturall Lords) and the Venezaras and C••lles, of like condition in Balaguate, to this day exercise Robberies in those parts: the Kingdome of Decan to these, and to the first the Kingdome of Cambaya, paying tribute, to be freed from the same. And the Kings suffer them, that they may share with them. The Kingdome of Dely is Northerly, subiect to Cold and Frosts, as in Europe. The Mo∣gores had possessed this Kingdome, but a certaine Bengalan (rebelling against his Master) slew him, vsurped his State, and by force of war••e added this also to his Do∣minion; he was called Xaholam r 1.136 . This King made his sisters sonne s 1.137 his successor, who was much addicted to Foreiners: he diuided his Kingdome into twelue parts, or Prouinces, ouer which he set so many Captaines: Idalcam, from Angidaua to Ci∣farda: from thence to Negarona, Nizamaluco: Ouer Balaguate, or the vp-Hill Countrey (for Bala in the Persian Language signifieth the toppe, and Guate a Hill) Imadmaluco, and Catalmaluco, and Verid••, &c.

These all rebelled, and captiued Daquem their King at Beder, the chiefe Citie of De∣can, and shared his Kingdome amongst themselues, and some Gentiles, partners in the conspiracie. They were all foreiners but Niza∣maluco. This and the other names, be∣fore-mentioned, were titles of honour giuen them, with their Offices, by the King, cor∣rupted by the vulgar in pronouncing. Idalcam is Adel-ham. Adel, in the Persian Language, signifieth Iustice; Ham is the Tartarian appellation, signifying a Prince, or King (which name might well be the Relikes of the Tartarian Conquests in those parts) so Adelham is, King of Iustice. Neza in the Persian (which Scaliger t 1.138 sayth is of like extent in the East, as Latine in the West) is a Launce: Maluco signifieth the King∣dome. Neza, or Nizamaluco, the Speare of Launce of the Kingdome. So Cota maluco the Tower of the Kingdome, Imadmaluco the Throne of the Kingdome, &c. Niza∣maluco is also called Nizamoxa: which Xa, or Seha, is a Persian title (signifying u 1.139 as Monsiour in France, or Don in Spaine) and giuen by Ismael the Sophi, and Tamas his sonne, to all those Kings that would communicate in their Sect, which Nizamoxa onely yeelded to. Other of them made shew, but soone recanted. Thus farre Garcias.

The Religion in Cambaia is partly Moorish, partly Heathenish. Vertomannus x 1.140 is author, that they worship not Idols, or Pagodes. Others report, That this way, and o∣thers, they are exceeding religiously deuoted. They obserue a strict kind of y 1.141 fasting, which lasteth with some eight dayes, with others fifteene, twentie, or thirtie dayes: in all which space they cate not a bit; onely, when they thirst, drinke water. One could not see when to make an end of this his penance, till his left eye fell out of his head, as both had done before out of his heart. In Cambaia they had one Bramene in such reputation of holinesse and honour, that they would salute him before they medled with their worldly affaires. One affirmed to this Iesuite, That if his Bramene should commaund him to distribute all his goods to the poore, he would doe it, yea, he would lay downe his life at his commaund.

On the eight day of Ianuarie z 1.142 in that Citie, were giuen in almes twentie thousand Pardawes (which is in value about a Flemish Dollar;) one man had giuen fiue thou∣sand thereof, another three thousand, another fifteene hundred. The cause was, be∣cause that day (as their Bramenes affirmed) the Sunne departed from Sur to Horte. Of their Pilgrimages is spoken before; some Eastward to Ganges; some Westward to Mecca, to wit, the Moores; not men alone, but women also: and because Mahomet hath forbidden all vnmarried women this holy iourney, they will marrie before they set forth, and dissolue the same Marriage againe, after their returne. Hereby they thinke to purchase merit with GOD.

I went one day (sayth Pinnerus) to the publike Hospitall, which the Citizens of Cambaia had founded for all kindes of birds, to cure them in their sicknesse. Some Peacockes were there incurable, and therefore might haue beene expelled the Hospi∣tall. But (alacke for pitie of so rufull an accident) a Hawke had beene admitted thi∣ther for the cure of his lame legge, which being whole, he inhospitally slew many of these co-hospitall weaker Fowles, and was therefore expelled this Bird-Colledge by the Master thereof. For men they had not an Hospitall that were thus Hospitall to Fowles.

They haue certaine Religious persons, called Verteas a 1.143 , which liue in a Colledg•• together, and when I went to their house, they were about fiftie in number. They ware white Cloth, were bare-headed, and shauen; if that word might be applyed to them, who pull off their haire on their heads and faces, leauing only a little on their Crowne. They liue on almes, nor receiue they but the surplusage of the daily foode of him that giueth them. They are wiuelesse. The Orders of their Sect are written in a booke of the Guzarates writing. They drinke their water hote, not for Physicke, but deuotion, sup∣posing that the water hath a soule, which they should slay, if they dranke the same vnsodden. For the same cause they beare in their hands certaine little brushes, with which they sweepe the floore, before they sit downe, or walke, least they should kill the soule of some Worme, or other small Creature. I saw their Priour thus doing.

The Generall of this Order is said to haue an hundred thousand men vnder his ca∣nonicall obedience, and is newly chosen euery yeare. I saw amongst them little boyes, of eight or nine yeares old, resembling the countenances of Europe, rather then of In∣dia, by their parents consecrated to this Order. They had all in their mouth a cloath, foure fingers broad, let thorow both their eares in a hole, and brought backe againe thorow their eares. They would not shew me the cause; but I perceiued it was, lest some gnat or flie should enter thither, and so be slaine. They teach that the world was made many hundred thousand yeares agoe: and that GOD did then send three and twentie Apostles, and now hath sent the foure and twentieth in this third age, two thousand yeares since, from which time they haue had writing, which before they had not.

The same b 1.144 Author in another Epistle saith, That the most of the Inhabitants of Cambaia are Bramenes. They eat no flesh, nor kill any thing, yea they redeeme beasts and birds maimed or sicke, and carry them to their hospitals to be cured. In Guzza∣rat he had seene many Gioghi, a religious order of Monkes, which yeeld to none in pe∣nance and pouertie. They goe naked in cold weather: they sleepe on dung-hils vpon an heap of ashes, with which they couer their head and face. I saw the place where one of these Gioghi kept in the middest of the Citie Amadeba, to whom, in conceit of ho∣linesse, resorted more numbers of people, then to the shores of Lisbone, at the returne of the Indian Fleet. This Gioghi was sent for by the Prince Sultan Morad, son of the Mogor, and refused to come, c 1.145 bidding that the Prince should come to him: it is e∣nough that I am holy, or a Saint to this end. Whereupon, the Prince caused him to be apprehended, and (being soundly whipped) to be banished.

This people killeth not their kine, but nourisheth them as their mothers. I saw at Amadeba, when a cow was readie to die, they offered her fresh grasle, and draue the flies from her: and some of them gaue this attendance two or three daies after, till she was dead. A league and a halfe from this Citie, I saw a certaine Coemiterium or burying∣place, then which I had neuer seene a fairer sight, wherein had beene buried one Ca∣zis, the Master of a King of Guzarat, who had crected this Fabrike, and three other were buried in another Chappell. The whole worke and pauement was of Marble, containing three Iles: in one whereof, I told foure hundred and forty pillars, with their chapiters and bases of Corinthian worke, very royall and admirable. On one side was a lake, greater then the Rozzio at Lisbone; and that building was curiously framed with faire windowes, to looke into the lake.

Linschoten d 1.146 affirmeth the same things of their Pythagorean errour, and addeth that they sometimes buy fowles or other beasts of the Portugals, which meant to haue dressed them, and let them flee or runne away. In the high-wayes also and woods they set pots with water, and cast corne or other graine vpon the ground, to feed the birds and beasts. And (to omit their charitable Hospitalls before mentioned) if they take a flea or a louse, they will not kill it, but put it in some hole or corner in the wall, and so let it goe: and you can doe them no greater iniury, then to kill it in their pre∣sence, which with all entreatie they will resist, as being a hainous sinne, to take away the life of that, to which GOD hath imparted both soule and bodie; and where words will not preuaile, they will offer money. They eat no Radishes, Onyons, Garlike, or any kinde of herbe, that hath red colour in it, nor egges, for they thinke there is bloud in them, They drinke not wine, nor vse vineger, but only water. They would rather starue, then eat with any, but their countrey-men: as it happened when I sailed from Goa to Cochin with them in a Portugall shippe, when they had spent all their store, the time falling out longer then they made account of; they would not once touch our meat. They wash themselues euery time they eate, or ease themselues, or make water. Vnder their haire they haue a starre vpon their foreheads, which they rub eue∣ry morning with a little white sanders tempered with water, and three or foure grains of Rice among it, which the Bramenes also doe as a superstitious ceremony of their law. They sit on the ground in their houses, vpon mattes or carpets, and so they eate, leauing their staues (which are piked and hooked) at the doore: for which cause the

heeles of their shooes are seldome pulled vp, to saue labour of vndoing them.

The Moores e 1.147 amongst them will sometimes abuse the superstition of these Cam∣bayans to their owne couetousnesse, bringing some Worme, Rat, or Sparrow, and threatning to kill the same, so to prouoke them to redeeme the life thereof at some high price. And likewise if a malefactor be condemned to death, they will purchase his life of the Magistrate, and sell him for a slaue. The Moores will sometimes make semblance, as if they would kill themselues, that these foolish Guzzarates may see them in like sort. They will goe out of the path, if they light on an Ant-hill, lest they might happily treade on some of them: they suppe by day-light, lest their candle∣light should occasion the death of some gnat or flie. And when they must needs vse a candle, they keepe it in a lanthorne for that cause. If lice doe much annoy them, they call to them certaine religious and holy men, after their account: and these Ob∣seruants f 1.148 will take vpon them all those lice which the other can finde, and put them on their head, there to nourish them. But yet for all this lousie scruple, they sticke not at cousinage by false weights, measures and coyne, nor at vsury and lies.

Some are said g 1.149 to bee zealous in their Idoll-seruice; as to sacrifice their liues in their honor, by a diuine cutting off their heads: the Priest meane-while muttering his damned holinesse, for which they are accounted Saints.

CHAP. VIII.

Of the Indian Nations betwixt Cambaia and Malabar, and their Religions.

THe mightie Riuers of Indus and Ganges paying their Fine to the Ledi•• of waters, the Ocean, almost vnder the very tropike of Cancer, doe (as it were) betwixt their watery armes present into that their Mothers bosome this large Chersonesiu; A Countrey, full of Kingdomes, riches, people, and (our duest taske) superstitious customes. As Italy is diuided by the Apennine, so is this by the hills which they call Gate, quite tho∣row to the Cape Comori, which not only haue entered league with many in-lets of the sea, to diuide the soile into many signories and kingdomes, but with the aire and Na∣tures higher officers, to dispense with the ordinarie orders, and stablished statutes of Nature, a 1.150 at the same time, vnder the same eleuation of the Sunne, diuiding to Sum∣mer and Winter their seasons and possessions. For whereas Cold is banished out of these Countries (except on the toppes of some hills) and altogether prohibited to ap∣proach so neere the Court and presence of the Sunne; and thefore their Winter and Summer is not reckoned by heate and cold, but by the fairenesse and foulensse of weather, which in those parts diuide the yeare by equall proportions: at the same time, when on the West-part of this Peninsula, betweene that rige of Moun∣taines and the Sea, it is after their appellation Summer, which is from September till Aprill, in which time it is alwayes cleare skie, without once (or very little) ray∣ning: on the other side the hills which they call the coast of Choromandell, it is their Winter; euery day and night yeelding abundance of raines, besides those terrible thunders, which both beginne and end their Winter. And from Aprill till Septem∣ber in a contra∣rie vicissitude; on the Westerne part is Winter, and on the Easterne Summer; in so much that in little more then twentie leagues iourney in some place, as where they crosse the hills to Saint Thoma••, on the one side of the hill you ascend with a faire Summer, on the other you descend attended with a stormie Winter. The like, saith Linschoten, happeneth at the Cape Rosalgate, in Arabia, and in many other places of the East.

Their Winter also is more fierce then ours, euery man prouiding against the same, as if he had a voyage of so many moneths to passe by sea, their shippes are brought

into harbour, their houses can scarce harbour the inhabitants against the violent stormes, which choake the Riuers with Sands, and make the Seas vnnauigable. I leaue the causes of these things to the further scanning of Philosophers: the effects and affects thereof are strange. The Sea roareth with a dreadfull noyse: the windes blow with a certaine course from thence: the people haue a melancholike season, which they passe away with play: In the Summer the winde bloweth from the Land, beginning at Midnight, and continuing till Noone, neuer blowing aboue tenne Leagues into the Sea, and presently after one of the clocke vntill midnight, the contra∣rie wind bloweth, keeping their set-times, whereby they make the Land temperate, the heat otherwise would be vnmeasurable. But this change commonly causeth dis∣eases, Fluxes, Feuers, Vomitings, in dangerous (and to very many, in deadly) manner, as appeareth at Goa, where, in the Kings Hospitall (which is onely for white men) there die fiue hundred in a yeare. Here you may see both the North and South Starres; and little difference or none is found in the length of day and night through∣out the yeare.

Dely is the next Kingdome to Cambaia, now not the next, but the same; the moun∣taines which before diuided it, not prohibiting the Mogors forces to annexe it to his Crowne. Of it is spoken before in the Chapter of Cambaya, as also of Decan, which lyeth along the coast, betwixt the Riuers Bate and Aliga two hundred and fiftie miles. Here b 1.151 was, as is said, sometimes a Moore King; who, leading a voluptuous and idle life, by his Captaines was dispossessed of his State: the one of these was called Idal∣can: whose seat royall is Visapore, who in the yeare 1572. incamped before Goa, which the Portugals had taken from him, with an armie of seuenty thousand foot, and fiue and thirtie thousand horse, two thousand Elephants, and two hundred and fiftie peeces of Artillery. The other was Nizzamalucco, which resideth in Danaget, and besieged Chaul, with not much lesse forces, against a captaine of the Venazary, which are a people that liue on spoile, as the Resbuti in Cambaia, the Belemi in Delly, Canara or Concam, seemeth to haue beene a part of Decan, but is possessed by the King of Narsinga, whose state is on the East side of the Mountaines: it hath in it the coast∣townes of Onor, Batticalla, Mayander and Mangalor, c 1.152 famous for traffique, but e∣clipsed by the Portugals neighbourhood. In these parts sometimes raigned a Benga∣lan Prince, which diuided his state among his Captaines, which originally for the most part were slaues, that he might ease himselfe of the cares of Gouernment. And as hee imparted to them great places; so did he likewise honorable names, d 1.153 calling one Idal∣cam, which signifieth the King of Iustice; another Nisamalucco, that is, the Speare of the Kingdome; another Cotamalucco, the strength of the Kingdome; another Ima∣demalucco, the pillar of the Kingdome; another Melique Verido, the keeper of the Kingdome, &c. But he that should haue beene the keeper of the Kingdome, was made the keeper of the King, whom these his slaues and officers by ioynt conspiracie had ta∣ken prisoner at Bider, his ch••fe towne; the Countrey of Decan falling to those two which are before named, and the rest to the rest.

Goa e 1.154 is the seat of the Viceroy, and of the Arch-bishop, and of the Kings Counsell for the Indies, and the staple of all Indian commodities. It standeth in a little Iland, called Tizz••arin, nine miles long, and three broad. Bardes on the North, and Sal∣zette, are both in like subiection to the Portugals; the King letting them to ferme, and employing the rents to the payment of the Arch-bishop, Cloysters, Priests, Viceroy, and other his officers. There dwell in this Towne of all Nations and Religions. The Gouernment is as in Portugal. Only publike vse of forren Religion is forbidden them: but in their houses priuately, or on the maine land, they may practise the same. The Portugalls many of them are married with Indian women, and their posteritie are called Mestic••s, and in the third degree, differ nothing in colour and fashion from naturall Indians. Of the Portugalls they reckon two sorts, married men, and soul∣diers, which is a generall name to all Bachellours, although they are at their own com∣mand. Of these are many Knights, and are called Canalhiero Pidalgo: for if a man doe any thing worth reckoning, presently his Captaine imparteth this honor to him;

whereof they much boast themselues, albeit that this Knight-hood had descended to Cookes boyes. Many of the Portugalls liue onely by their slaues. They vse great ce∣remonie or pride (which you will call it) in their behauiour: the particulars whereof let Linschoten f 1.155 , that there liued amongst them, teach you.

Besides both Abassine and Armenian Christians, Iewes, and Moores, heere are ma∣ny Heathens. The Moores eate all things but swines flesh, and dying, are buried like the Iewes. The Heathens, as De••anijns, Guzarates, and Canarijns, are burnt to ashes, and some women aliue are buried with the Gentlemen or Bramenes, their husbands. Some will eat nothing that had life; some all but the flesh of Kine, or Buffles. Most of them pray to the Sunne and Moone: yet all acknowledge a GOD that made all things, and ruleth them, after this life rendering to all according to their workes. But they haue Pagodes, which are Images, cut and framed most vgly, and like monstrous Diuels, to whom they pray and offer: and to Saints which heere haue liued holy, and are now intercessours for them. The Diuell often answereth them out of those Images, to whom also they offer, that he should not hurt them. They present their Pagode (when a marriage is to be solemnized) with the Brides maiden-head; two of her nee∣rest kinswomen forcing her vpon the Iuory pinne, (leauing the bloud there for monu∣ment) of that diuellish Idoll; the husband herein applauding his happinesse. They haue for the most part a custome to pray vnto the first thing they meete withall in the morning, and all that day after they pray vnto it; be it Hogge, or any other thing. But if they first meete with a Crow (whereof there are great store) they will not for any thing stirre out againe that day, after so vnluckie a signe. They pray likewise to the new Moone, saluting her first appearance on their knees. They haue Iogos or Hermits reputed very holy: many Iuglers also and Witches, which shew diuellish tricke••. They neuer goe forth without praying. Euery hill, cliffe, hole, or denne, hath his Pa∣godes in it, with their furnaces hard by them, and their cesternes alwaies full of water, with which euery one, that passeth by, washeth his feete, and then worshippeth and offereth Rice, Egges, or what else their deuotion will afford: which the Bramen•• eateth. When they are to goe to sea, they will feast their Pagode with trumpets, fires, and hangings, fourteene dayes before they set forth, to obtaine a good voyage: and as long after their returne: which they vse to doe in all their feasts, marriages child∣births, and their haruest and seed-seasons.

CHAP. IX.

Of the Indian Bramenes.

THe Indian Heathens haue a custome, that no man may change his fa∣thers trade, but must succeed in the same, and marry a wife also of the same Tribe. The Brachmanui, or, as they are at this day called, the Bramenes (who haue their shoppes, as well as other Merchants, throughout the Cities) are of best reputation, and weare in signe of their profession (from the shoulder crosse vnder the arme, vpon their naked bodie, downe to the girdle) three strings like sealing threeds: which for their liues they will not, nor may by their vow put off. They are naked, sauing that about their middles, they haue a cloath bound to hide their priuities. And sometime when they goe abroad, they cast a thinne gowne ouer them. Vpon their heads they weare a white cloath, wound twice or thrice about therewith, to hide their haire, which they neuer cut off, but weare it long, and turned vp as the women doe. They haue common∣ly hanging at their eares, gold-rings. They are very subtill in writing and accounts, making other simple Indians beleeue what they will. Whatsoeuer they meet first with in the streets, they pray to all day after.

When the Bramenes die, a 1.156 all their friends assemble together, and make a hole in the ground, in which they throw much sweet wood, spices, rice, corne, and oyle. Then lay they therein the dead bodie: his wife followeth with musicke, and many of her neerest friends, singing praises in commendation of her husbands life, encoura∣ging her to follow him, which accordingly shee doth. For, parting her Iewels a∣mong her friends, with a cheerefull countenance shee leapes into the fire, and is pre∣sently couered with wood and oyle, whereby she is quickely dead, and with her hus∣bands bodie burned to ashes. And if it chanceth (which is seldome) that any woman resu••eth this fiery coniunction they cut the haire cleane off from her head, neither may she after that weare Iewell, but is accounted a dishonest woman. This custome is (as may appeare) very ancient, and supposed to haue beene ordained, because of the libi∣dinous disposition of the Indian women, which for their lusts would often poison their husbands.

The Bramenes obserue fasting-dayes with so great abstinence, that they eate no∣thing that day, and sometime not in three or foure dayes together. They tell many miracles of their Pagodes. They hold the immortalitie of the soule, both of beasts and men, and that so often mentioned Pythagorean succession, and renuing of mens soules, in beasts; and contrariwise. They by the direction of the Diuell (the author of their miracles) frame such deformed statues to their Idols.

The Indian women in Goa, when they goe forth, haue but one cloath about their bodies, which couereth their heads, and hangeth downe to the knees, otherwise na∣ked. They haue rings thorow their noses, about their legges, toes, neckes, and armes, and seuen or eight bracelets vpon their hands (according to their abilitie) of glasse or other mettall. When the woman is seuen yeares old, and the man nine, they marrie, but come not together till the woman is able to beare children. Master Fitch mentioneth b 1.157 the solemnitie of these marriages, & the cause, to be the burning of the mother when the father is dead, that they might haue a father-in-law to bring them vp.

To leaue Goa with this Iland. The Canaras and Decanijns weare their beards and haire long, without cutting, as the Bramenes. They except from food Kine, Hogges, and Buffles. They account the Oxe, Cow, or Buffle to bee holy, which they haue commonly in the house with them, and they besmeere, stroke and handle them with all friendshippe in the world; feede them with the same meate they eate themselues; and when the beasts ease themselues, they hold vnder their hands, and throw the dung away: they sleepe with them in their houses, hereby thinking to doe GOD seruice. In other things they are as the Bramenes. For those are the Laitie; these are the Spiritualtie. When they take their oathes, they are set within a circle of ashes, on the pauement, and laying a few ashes on their head, the other on their breasts, sweare by their Pagodes to tell the truth.

The Canarij••s and the Corumbijns are the rustickes, and countrey-husbandmen, the most miserable people of all India: their religion is much as the other. They co∣uer onely their priuities, and eate all things except Kine, Oxen, Buffles, Hogges, and Hennes flesh. Their women bind a cloath about their nauell, which reacheth halfe∣way the thigh: they are deliuered alone by themselues, without other helpe: their children are brought vp naked, till they be seuen or eight yeares old, without any trouble about them, except washing them in a little cold water, and liue to bee an hundred yeares old, without head-ache, or losse of teeth. They nourish a tuffe of haire on their crownes, cutting the rest. When the man is dead, the wife breaketh her glasse-iewels, and cutteth off her haire; his bodie is burnt. They eate so little, as if they liued by the aire: and for a peny would endure whipping.

In Salsette are two Temples, or holes rather of Pagodes, renowned in all India: one of which is cut from vnder a hill, of hard stone, and is of compasse within, about the bignes of a Village of foure hundred houses: with many galleries or chambers of these deformed shapes, one higher then another, cut out of the hard rocke. There are in all three hundred of these galleries. The other is in another place, of like matter & forme. It would make a mans haire stand vpright to enter amongst them. In a little Iland cal∣led

Pory, there standeth a high hill, on the top whereof is a hole, that goeth downe in∣to the hill, digged and carued out of the hard rocke; within, as large as a great cloister, round beset with shapes of Elephants, Tigers, Amazons, and other like, workemanly cut, supposed to be the Chinois handy-worke. But the Portugalls haue now ouer∣throwne these Idoll-Temples. Would GOD they had not set new Idols in the roome; with like practise of offerings and pilgrimages, as did these to their Pagodes.

I once c 1.158 went into a Temple of stone, in a Village, & found nothing in it, but a great table that hung in the middle of the Church, with the image of a Pagode thereon pain∣ted, hellishly disfigured with many hornes, long teeth out of the mouth downe to the knees, and beneath his nauell with such another tusked & horned face. Vpon the head stood a triple crowne, not much vnlike the Popes. It hung before a wall, which made a partition from another chamber, like a quier, close without any light: in the middle wherof was a little doore, and on each side of it a furnace within the wall, with certaine holes thereby to let the smoake or sauour of the fire to enter into that place, when any offering should be made. Whereof we found there some, Rice, Corne, Fruits, Hens, and such like. There issued thence such a filthy smoke, & stink, that it made the place black, and almost choked such as entred. We desired the Bramene to open the doore, which with much intreaty he did, offering first to throw ashes on our foreheads, which we re∣fused, so that before he would open vs the doore, we were forced to promise him not to enter beyond the doore. It shewed within like a lime-kill, being close vaulted, without hole of window: neither had the Church it selfe any light but the doore. Within the said Cell hung an hundred burning lampes, and in the middle stood a little Altar coue∣red with cotton cloth, and ouer that with gold; vnder which, as the Bramene told vs, sate the Pagode all of gold, of the bignes of a Puppet.

Hard by the Church without the great doore, stood within the earth a great foure∣square cisterne, hewed out of free stone, with staires on each side to go downe into it, full of greene, filthy, & stinking water, wherein they wash themselues, when they meane to enter into the Church to pray. In the euening, they carried their Pagode on Proces∣sion, first ringing a bell, wherewith the people assembled, and tooke the Pagode out of his Cell with great reuerence, and set it in a Palamkin, which was borne by the chiefe men of the Towne; the rest following with great deuotion, with their vsuall noise and sound of trumpets, & other instruments; & hauing caried him a pretty circuit, brought him to the stone-cisterne, washed him, & placed him againe in his Cell, making a foule smoke and stinke, and euery man leauing his offering behind him, intended to the Pa∣gode, but consumed by the Bramene and his family. As we went along by the waies, we found many such shapes vnder certaine couertures, with a small cisterne of water hard by, and halfe an Indian nut hanging thereby, to take vp water withall, for the trauellers to wash and pray. By the said Pagodes doe stand commonly a Calfe of stone, and two little furnaces; before which they present their offerings. My fellow leaping on one of those Calues in the Church, the Bramene called out, and the people came running, but we staied their furie by gentle perswasion of the Bramene before. And thus much of these deformed formes, and mishapen shapes, with their worshippings and worship∣pers sutable. Like lips, like lettice. Vaine Rites, stinking sinkes and smokes, vgly Idols, conspiring with internall Darknes of the mindes, and externall Darknes of their Tem∣ples; to bring an eternall Darknes to the followers, that all may shut vp (as they are begunne) in a hellish period.

Botero saith, The Bramenes also worship d 1.159 one Parabramma, and his three sons, and in honor of them weare those three threeds afore-said. Hee affirmeth, that the Ioghi wander vp and downe through India, abstaining from all carnall pleasure, but a certaine time; which being expired, they are past possibilitie of further sinning, and are then called Abduti, as the illuminate Elders of the Familists, polluting themselues in all filthines. The Bramenes f 1.160 haue Images of the Trinity and haue in religious estimation the number of Three. They acknowledge and pray to the Trinity in Vnity: but affirme many Demi-gods, which are his Deputies in gouerning the world. They honour the Portugalls Images also, as approaching to their owne superstition. They marry but one

wife, and admit no second succeeding marriage. The Bramenes must descend of the Bra∣mene Tribe, and others cannot aspire to that Priesthood: but some are of higher account then others: For some serue for messengers, which in time of war, & among theeues may passe safely, & are called Fathers. They will not put a Bramene to death for any crime.

When they are seuen yeeres old g 1.161 they put about their necke, a string two fingers broad made of the skin of a beast called Cressuamengan, like a wilde Asle, together with the haire: which he weareth till he is foure yeares old, all which time he may not cate h 1.162 Be∣telle. That time expired, the said string is taken away, and another of three threds put on, in signe that he is become a Bramen, which he weareth all his life. They haue a principall amongst them, which is their Bishop, which correcteth them, if they doe amisse. They marry but once, as is said, and that not all, but onely the eldest of the Brethren, to conti∣nu•• the succession, who is also heyre of the fathers substance, and keepeth his Wife streitly, killing her, if he finde her Adulterous, with poison. The yonger brethren lie with other mens wiues, which account the same as a singular honour done vnto them. They haue great reuenues belonging to their churches, besides offerings, and at set houres of the day resort thither to sing and doe other their holy rites. Twice in the day, and as of∣ten in the night, their Pagode is taken out of the Altar, and set on the Bramenes head, looking, backward, and is carried in procession three times about the Church, the Bra∣menes wiues carrying lights burning: euery time they come to the principall doore of the Church, which is on the West side thereof (some churches haue two doores beside) they set it downe on their offering-stone, and worship it. Twice a day they bring it to eate of their sod Rice, as often (it seemeth) as the Bramene is hungry. When they wash them (which is often) they lay a little ashes on their heads, foreheads, and breasts, saying that they shall returne into ashes. When the Bramenes wife is with child, as soone as he knoweth it, he clenseth his teeth, and abstaineth from Betelle, and obserueth fasting till she be deliuered. The Kings of Malabar will scarse eate meate but of their dressing. i 1.163 They are of such estimation, that it Marchants trauell among theeues, and robbers, one Bramene in the company secureth them all, which Bramene will eate nothing of an other mans dressing: and would not become a More for a Kingdome. Ni.di Conti saith k 1.164 he saw a Bramene three hundred yeares old: hee addeth, that they are studious in A∣strologie, Geomancie, and Philosophy. To be short, they are the Masters of Ceremonies and the Indian Religion, in whose Precepts the Kings are trained vp. Besides these l 1.165 se∣cular Bramenes, there are other Regular, as those Ioghi and Vertae: of which wee haue spoken. There are also some that liue as Heremites in Deserts: some in Colledges: some wander from place to place begging: Some (an vnlearned kinde) are called Sanasses: m 1.166 Some, contrarie to the rest, nothing esteeme Idols, obserue Chastitie twenty or fiue and twenty yeares, and feede daily on the Pith of a fruit called Caruza, to preserue in them that cold humour, neither doe they abstaine from Flesh, Fish, or Wine, and when they passe along the way, one goeth before them crying Poo Poo, that is, way, way: yea, the King himselfe honoureth them; and not they, the King: Some liue, enclosed in iron Cages all filthy with Ashes which they strew on their heads and garments: some burne some part of their body voluntarily: All are vaine-glorious, and seeke rather the shell then the Kernell, the shew then the substance of holines. I haue thought good to say thus much together of them, as in one view representing the Bramenes; a name so aunciently, so vniuersally communicated to the Indian Priests, although some par∣ticulars before haue beene, or hereafter may bee said touching some of them in other places, according to the singularitie of each Nation in this so manifold a profession.

CHAP. X.

Of the Regions and Religions of Malabar.

MAlabar extendeth it selfe a 1.167 from the Riuer Cangeracon to the Cape Comori; which some take to bee the Promontory Cory, in Ptolomey: Maginus doubteth whether it be that which hee calleth Commaria extrema. b 1.168 In the length it containeth little lesse then three hundred miles, in bredth from that ridge of Gate to the Sea, in some places, fiftie. It is full of people, diuided into many states, by varietie of Ri∣uers, which cause horses to be vnseruiceable in their Warres, and nourish many Cro∣codiles, enrich the soile, and yeeld easie transportation of commodities, which are spi∣ces of diuers kindes. They haue Batts, in shape resembling Foxes, in bignes, Kytes. The chiefe kingdomes in this Tract are Kano••or, Calecut, Cranganor, Cochin, Carcolam, and Tranancon. About c 1.169 seuen hundred yeares since it was one kingdome, gouerned by Scma, or Sarama Perimal, who by perswasion of the Arabian Marchants became of their Sect, in which he proued so deuout, that hee would end his daies at Mecca. But before his departure hee diuided his estate into these petty Signories, among his principall Nobles and kindred: leauing vnto Coulam the spirituall preheminence, and the Imperiall Title vnto his Nephew of Calicut, who onely enioyed the Title of Zamori or Emperour, and had prerogatiue of stamping Come. Some exempt from this Zamoria Empire and Allegeance, both Coulam, the papall Sea of the High Bra∣mene, and Cananor: and some haue since by their owne force exempted themselues. This Perimal died in his holy voyage: and the Indians of Malabar reckon from this diuision their Computation of yeares, as wee doe from the blessed Natiuitie of our LORD. Hee left (saith Castaneda) to himselfe but twelue leagues of his coun∣try, which lay neere to the shore where hee meant to imbarke himselfe, neuer before inhabited: this hee gaue to a Cousin of his then his Page, commanding, that in me∣mory of his imba••king there it should bee inhabited, commanding the rest to take him for their Emperour (except the Kings of Coulan and Cananor) whom yet with the rest hee commanded not to Coine money, but onely the King of Calacut. For Calecut was therefore here built: and the Mores for the imbarking tooke such de∣uotion to the place, that they would no more frequent the Port of Coulan, as be∣fore (which therefore grew to ruine) but made Calicut the staple of their Marchan∣dise.

Calicut, the first in order with them, shall bee so with vs. The Citie is not walled nor faire built, the ground not yeelding firme foundation, by reason of the water which issueth if it bee digged. This Kingdome hath not aboue fiue and twenty leagues of Sea-coast, yet rich both by the fertilitie of the soile, which yeeldeth corne, spices, Co∣cos, Iaceros, and many other Fruits: and by the situation; as the Staple, especially be∣fore the Portugales vnfriendly neighbourhood, of Indian Merchandise, and therefore in her varietie of Marchants beeing a Mappe (as it were) of all that Easterne vvorld. The d 1.170 Aegyptians, Persians, Syrians, Arabians, Indians, yea, euen from Catay the space of six thousand miles iourney, here had their trade and traffique. The Pallace also contained foure halles of Audience, according to their Religions, for the Indians, Mores, Iewes, Christians. Of their Bramenes or Priestes wee haue al∣ready said. They yeeld Diuine honours to diuers of their deceased Saints, and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 (dedicated to an A••e) hath large por∣ches, and hath (saith Maffaus) seuen hundred Marble Pillars, not interiour to •••••• of Agrippa in the Romane Panthcon. It seemeth that the ground in that place is not of so queasie and waterie a stomach, but that it can digest deepe foundations. To Elephants they attribute like Diuinitie: but most of all to Kine, supposing

that the soules of men departed doe most of all enter into these beasts. They haue ma∣ny bookes of their superstition approching to the Augur••il discipline of the He••••••••••∣ans, and fond Fables of the Graecians: and diligently conceale the same from vul∣gar knowledge, except some Bramene Proselyte doe detect those Mysteries. They beleeue One GOD Maker of Heauen and Earth, but adde that hee could haue no pleasure in so weightie a charge of gouerning the World, and therefore hath de∣legated the same to the Diuell to reward euery man according to his workes; him they call Deumo: they name God Tamerani. f 1.171 The King hath in his Palace the Chap∣pell of Deumo, carued full of Deuils, and in the middest fi••teth this Image of met∣••all in a Throne of the same matter, with a triple crowne like the Popes, and foure hornes, with teeth, eyes, and mouth wide and terrible, with hooked hands, and feete like a Cocke. In each corner of this square Chappell is a Diuell set in a fietie Throne, wherein are many soules, the Diuell putting one with his right hand into his mouth, and taking another from vnder him with his left hand. This Idoll is washed by the Bramenes with sweet water, incensed and worshipped euery mor∣ning. Sometime in the weeke they sacrifice on this manner. They haue an Altar strewed with Flowers, on which they put the bloud of a Cocke, and coales of fire in a Siluer Chafingdish, with much persumes, incensing about the Altar, and often tinging with a little Bell of Siluer. They hold in their hands a siluer knife, with which the Cocke was killed, which they dippe in the bloud, and put into the fire with many Apish gestures. All the bloud is thus burned, many Waxe-candles bur∣ning meane-while. The Priest hath on his wrists and legges as it were Morrice-Bels 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 at his necke: and when hee hath ended his Sacrifice, hee taketh his hands full of Wheate, goeth ••ackewar•• from the Altar (on vvhich hee alwaies sixeth his eyes) to a certaine tree, and then ••urleth the Corne vp ouer his head as high as hee can: after vvhich hee returneth and vnfurnisheth the Altar. The King of Calicut eateth no meate, before foure prin∣cipall Bramenes haue first offered thereof to the Deuill, which they doe lifting both their hands ouer their heads, and shutting their fists draw backe the same with their thumbe, presenting of that meate to the Idol, and then carry it to the King on a great Leafe, in a treene platter. The King fitteth on the ground at his meate, vvithout any thing vnder him, attended with Bramenes, standing foure paces off, with their hands before their mouthes in great reuerence. And after the King hath eaten•• those Priests carry the reliques into the Court, where they clap thrice with their hands, whereat presently certaine Crowes resort thither to eate the Kings leauings, which crowes are hereunto accustomed and may not be hurt of any.

When the King marrieth a Wife, g 1.172 one of the principall Bramenes hath the first rights lodging with her, for which hee hath assigned him by the King foure hundred, or fiue hundred ducats. The King and his Gentlemen, or Nairos, eate not flesh with∣out licence of the Bramenes. The King committeth the custodie of his Wife to the Bramenes, when hee trauelleth any whither, and taketh in too honest part their di∣shonest familiaritie. But for this cause, the Kings sonne succeedeth not in the crowne, but his Sisters sonne, as being certainly of his bloud. These sisters of the King chuse what Gentleman they please, on whom to bestow their Virginitie, and they proue not in a certaine time to bee with childe, they betake them to these Bramene-stalli∣ons.

The Gentlemen and Marchants haue a custome to exchange wiues in token of great friendship. Some women amongst them haue six or seuen husbands, fathering her children on which of them she best pleaseth. If a debter breake day with his creditor, and often disappoint him, hee goeth to the principall of the Bramenes, and receiueth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 circle about him chargeth him in the name of the King, and the said Bramena, not to depart thence till ne hath satisfied the debt, which if he doe not, he must sterue in the place; for if hee depart, the King will cause him to bee executed. The new King for one yeares space cateth

neither Fish not Flesh, nor cutteth his Haire, or Nailes: vseth certaine prayers day∣ly, eateth but one meale, and that after he hath washed, neither may hee looke on any man till he hath ended his repast. h 1.173 At the yeares end be maketh a great Feast, to which resort aboue ten thousand persons to confirme the Prince and his Officers: and then much almes is giuen. Hee entertaineth ten thousand women in diuers offices in his Pallace. These make to the King (after his fasting yeere is out) a Candlemasse-Feast, each of them carrying diuers lights from the Temple (where they first ob∣serue many Idoll and idle ceremonies) vnto the pallace with great musicke and other iollitie.

••. Ba••bosa reckoneth eighteene Sects that haue no mutuall conuersation, nor may mar∣ry but in their owne rankes or order. Next to the king and Bramenes, hee placeth the Nayros, which are Gentlemen and Souldiours, and are not professed Nairos (not∣withstanding their-bloud) till they bee by their Lords or by the King made Knights or Souldiours. And then hee must neuer from that time goe without his weapons, which commonly are a Rapier and a Target, and sometimes Peeces or Bowes. They neuer marry, but lie with such of the Nairos Women or Daughters as like them, lea∣t••••ng his weapons meane-while at the doore, which forbid any man else, although it be the good-man himselfe to enter, till hee hath ended his busines and bee gone. And if one of the common people once touch a Nairo, it is lawfull for the Nairo to kill him: and hee is also vncleane, and must bee purified by certaine washings. And for this cause they cry as they goe in the streetes, Po, Po, that the baser raskallity may giue place. They haue a pit of standing water at their doores hallowed by the Bra∣menes, wherein euery morning they wash themselues, although it be greene, s••••mie, and stinking, imagining thus to bee clensed of their sinnes. They are brought vp al∣together to foates of Armes and actituitie from their Child-hood, admirably able to winde and turne themselues, and are very resolute and desperate, binding themselues by Oath to liue and die with their King or Lord. No Nairo's wo∣men may enter into Calicut but one Night in the yeare, vvhen the Citie is full of lights: and they goe vvith the Nairos, to behold and gaze their fill. They intend nothing but their lust, and thinke that if they die Virgins they shall neuer enter into Paradise.

The Biabari are another sort, and are Merchants, Gentiles, and enioy great pri∣uiledges. The King cannot put them to death, but by sentence of the principall of themselues. They vvere the onely Ma••chants before the Mores traded there, and still enioy many possessions. These marry one Wife, and their Children inherit, and they may touch the Nairo's. The Cugianem are a Sect of the Nairo's, hauing a law and Idols by themselues, which they may neuer alter. They make Tiles to couer the Temples and the Kings Palace. The Nairo's may lye with their women, but must wash themselues before they goe home.

Another Sect is called Mananta••••ar, which are Landerers, nor may they or their posteritie be of other function: nor may they mingle themselues with any other gene∣ration. They haue Idol-ceremonies and temples by themselues. The Nairos may vse their wiues (or women rather.) Their brethren or Nephewes are their heires. The Calien are Weauers, and haue a distinct idolatrous Sect; otherwise are as the former.

Besides these of better condition, there are of baser sort eleuen Sects, which may not marry nor meddle with others. The first of these are called Tiberi, hus∣bandmen; the second, Moger, and are Marriners; both hauing their proper supersti∣tions, and vse their women in common. The third, are Astrologers, whom they call Caniun. Great men aske their counsell, but may not touch their persons. The Aggeri are Masons and workers in metalls. The Muchoa or Mechoe are Fishers; dwel∣ling in Villages by themselues; the men, theeues, the women Harlots, with whom they please. The Betua are Salt-makers: The Paerun are Iugglers, Inchanters, and Phy∣sicians (if such damnable deuillish practises may deserue so honourable name.) which, when any are sicke and require their helpe, vse coniuration to cause the Diuell to enter

into some of them, and then by his suggestion declare the euent of the disease, and what sacrifices or other things are to bee performed. They may not touch or bee touched of other men. The Reuolet are a baser sort of Gentiles, vvhich carry wood into the Citie to sell, and Hearbes. The Puler are as Excommunicate per∣sons, and liue in desert places, where the Nairos haue no occasion to passe, and when they goe neere any these Nairos, or any of the better sort, they crie as loude as they can (as i 1.174 the Lepers among the Iewes) that others may auoide them. For if any touch them, their kindr••o may for such action or passion slay them, and as many of these Puler also, as may make satisfaction for such disparagement. Some nights they will goe of purpose, seeking to touch some of the Nairo-wo∣men with hand, sticke, or hurling of a stone: vvhich if they effect, there is no re∣medie for the vvoman but to get her forth and liue with these Villaines, or to bee solde, to escape killing by the hands of her kindred. These Puler are Theeues and Sorcerers. The Pareas are of worse esteeme, and liue in Deserts vvith∣out commerce of any, reputed worse then the Diuell. These tenne sorts (or ele∣uen if you reckon two sorts of the Tiberi, as our Authour doth; whereof one are warriours, distinguished by a certaine cudgell, which they must carry in their hands, from the Nairos) are as well differing in Religions, as matters of common life: though, for their seuerall rites, it vvere wrong to the Reader at large to recite them, if we had the particulars to deliuer.

There are besides these Gentils, Naturall of Malabar, many strangers of In∣dians, Mores, and Christians. But in other Kingdomes of Malabar, the heathenish Religion is little differing from that in Calicut. k 1.175 Generally amongst them, the Bramenes and Kine are had in such honour, that when the Kings create their Nairos, he girdeth them with a sword, and embracing them one by one, bids them haue care of the Bra∣menes and the Kine.

Cranganor is a small Kingdome: the Inhabitants of the Citie, which giueth name to the Region, are Christiana of Saint Thomas prosession, about seuentie thousand in number. Cochin is now growne great by the Portugales traffique and friendship. Of the rest there is not much worth recitall. The Papall l 1.176 honour among the Bramenes, which some ascribe to Coulam, Maginus bestoweth on the King of Cochin. In these parts are now many Christian proselytes of the Iesuites conuersion, besides many of the old Thomas-Christians.

The King of Coulams Dominion m 1.177 stretcheth beyond the Cape Comori (where Malabar endeth) on the East side fourescore and ten miles, as farre as Cael: which di∣uers great Lords hold vnder him. Among the rest is the Signiorie of Quilacare. In the Citie of Quilacare is an Idoll of high account, to which they solemnize a Feast eue∣rie twelfth yeere, where the Gentiles resort as the Popish Christians in the Romish Iubilee. The Temple sacred to this Idoll hath exceeding great reuenue. The King (for so he is called) at this Feast erecteth a Scaffold couered with silke, and hauing wa∣shed himselfe with great solemnitie, hee prayeth before this Idoll: and then as∣cendeth the scaffold, and there in presence of all the people cutteth off his nose, and after that, his eares, lippes, and other parts, which hee castes towards the I∣doll, and at last hee cutteth his throate, making a butcherly sacrifice of himselfe to his Idoll. Hee that is to bee his successor must bee present hereat: for he must vn∣dergoe the same martyrdome, vvhen his twelue yeares Iubilee is come. Along this coast dwell the Paraui, simple people, and Christians, vvhich liue by fishing of Pearles. The Nairos make such holes in their eares, that Caesar Frederike n 1.178 saith he thrust his arme vp to the shoulders in one of them. They are prodigall in their liues in the honour of their King: Osorius o 1.179 telleth of some, which, like the re∣nowmed Decij. had vowed themselues to death, and not to returne from the enemy without victorie.

Besides those former Sects, Stephanus de Brito p 1.180 speaketh of the Maleas which inhabit small Villages in the mountaines, which are hunters of Elephants: amongst whom are no thefts or robberies, and therefore they leaue their doores open

when they goe abroad. They are skilfull in Musicke, and Magike. They haue no Idoll amongst them; onely they obserue their auncestors s••pulchers.

Of the Feast which all the Malabar-kings hold euery twelfth yere in honour of the Riuer Ganges, wee haue there spoken q 1.181 where we haue discoursed of the Riuer: This Feast lasteth eight and twenty or thirty daies with great solemnitie, to the furtherance whereof certaine souldiours; to the number of thritie; rush among the people, and kill as many as they can; themselues certaine to bee killed of the Kings Souldiors. This is the Tribute imposed by the King of Calecut on one of his vassals, to honour this so∣lemnitie with such a number that shall thus sell their liues as deare as they can. Of the Election and erection of the Zamoryn, we haue spoken in the beginning of the Chap∣ter: Let vs here adde out of Castaneda r 1.182 concerning his deuotion. Hee saith that this King of Calycut is a Bramene, as his predecessors also. And for that it is a custome that all the Kings die in one Pagode or Idol. temple, he is elected for that cause. For alwaies there is and must be in that house a King to serue those Idols, and when he that serueth there, dieth, then must the King that then raigneth leaue his Empire, and goe serue in that place as the other did; another being elected to succeede him in the Kingdome. And if any refuseth to forsake his Court for the Pagode, they enforce him there∣vnto.

The Kings of Malabar bee browne men, and goe naked from the Girdle vpward, and from thence downe ward they are couered with cloth of Silke and of Cotton, ador∣ned with Iewels. For their Children; the sonnes inherit not, but the brother, or if there bee none, the Sisters sonne. When their Daughters are ten yeares old, they send out of the Kingdome for a Nayro, and presenting him with giftes, request him to take her Virginitie: which hauing done, he tieth a Iewell about her necke, which shee weareth during her life, as a token that from thence-forth she hath free power of her body, to doe what she will, which before she might not. After their death s 1.183 these Kings are car∣ried forth into a plaine field, and there burned with sweet Wood, very costly, their kindred and all the Nobilitie of the country being present: which done, and the ashes buried, they shaue themselues, without leauing any haire except on the browes and eye-lids, euen on the least child; and for the space of thirteene daies cease to eate * 1.184 Betele (his lips are cut that doth it) and all that time is an Interregnum, wherein they obserue if any will come in to obiect any thing against the new future King. After this t 1.185 hee is sworne to the Lawes of his predecessor, to pay his debts, to recouer whatsoeuer be∣longed to his kingdome being lost, which oath hee taketh hauing his sword in his left hand, and in the right a Candle burning, which hath a ring of Gold vpon it, which hee toucheth with two of his fingers and taketh his oath. This being done, they throw or poure vpon him a few Graines of Rice, with many other ceremonies and prayers, and he worshippeth the Sunne three times: after which, all the Caymailes or principall No∣bles sweare their feal••ie to him, handling also the same Candle. The thirteene daies en∣ded, they eate their Betele againe, and flesh and fish as before; the King except, who then taketh thought for his predecessor, and for the space of one whole yeere (as is be∣fore obserued in part out of Barbosa) eates no Betele, nor shaueth his beard, nor cut∣teth his Nailes: eateth but once a day, and before he doth it, washeth all his body, and observeth certaine houres of prayer daily. The yeare being ended, he obserueth a kinde of Dirige for his predecessors soule, whereat are assembled a hundred thousand persons, at which time he giueth great Almes, and then is confirmed. All these Malabar-kings haue one especiall man, which is the cheefe administrator of Iustice, who in matters of gouernment is obeyed no lesse then the King himselfe. The Souldiors are Nayros, none of which can bee imprisoned or put to death by ordinarie iustice: but if one of them kill another, or else kill a Cowe, or sleepe with a Country-woman, or speake euill of the King; the King after information giues his warrant to another Nayro, who vvith his associates kill him wheresoeuer they finde him, hewing him with their swords, and then hang on him his warrant to testifie the cause of his death. These Nairos may not weare their weapons, or enter into combat, till they bee armed Knights, although that from the age of seuen yeares they are trained vp in feates and practise of Armes. Hee

u 1.186 is dubbed or created by the King, who commandeth to gird him with a Sword, and laying his right hand vpon his head, muttreth certaine words softly, & afterward dub∣beth him, saying; Haue a regard to keep these Bramenes, and their Kine. When they yeeld themselues to any mans seruice, they binde themselues to die with him, and for him, which they faithfully performe, fighting till they be killed. They are great Soothsay∣ers, haue their good and bad dayes, worship the Sunne, the Moone, the Fire, and the Kine, and the first they meete in the morning. The Deuill is often in them (they say it is one of their Pagodes) which causeth them to vtter terrible words; and then he go∣eth before the king with a naked Sword, quaking, and cutting his flesh, saying with great cries; I am such a God, and I am come to tell thee such a thing; and if the king doubteth, he roareth lowder, and cutteth himselfe deeper till he be credited. The Por∣tugalls haue much eclipsed the greatnesse of the king of Calycu••, and caused many o∣ther alterations in all the East in this last Age of the world. Of whose exploits Castane∣da, Barrius, Maffaeus, Osorius, and others haue written at large.

CHAP. XI.

Of the kingdome of Narsinga and Bisnag••r.

FRom those places where our feete last rested (or touched rather) vnto the Cape Guadauerin a 1.187 betwixt that ridge of mountaines called Gates, and the Ocean (which is there named the Gulfe of Bengala) trendeth the kingdome of Narsinga or Bisnagar; those two royall Cities con∣tending which shal giue name to this mighty Empire, containing two hundred leagues of Sea-coast. The king hath in continuall pay fortie thousand Nairos. But as occasion serueth, hee can bring into the field many many thousands more, as in that Expedition against Idalcan specified by Barrius and Bote∣rus; in which, to let passe that world b 1.188 of people, hee sacrificed vnto Idolls twentie thousand seuen hundred and three score head of beasts and fowles in nine dayes space, which in Idoll-deuotion were all bestowed after on the poore.

In the yeare of our LORD 1567. Biznagar c 1.189 was sacked by foure Kings of the Moores, (as saith Frederike) naming them Dialcan, Zamaluc, Cotamaluc and V••idy, through treason of her owne Captaines: but hauing sacked it (as not able to holde it) they retired home. The city remained after, an habitation for Tygers and wild beasts; containing in circuit foure and twenty miles, as our Author (that stayed there seuen moneths) affirmeth. Hee neüer sawe Pallace exceeding that of Bisnagar. It had nine gates, with guards of souldiers; Heere he obserued their rites in burning the women so often mentioned.

The woman d 1.190 taketh two or three moneths respite after her husbands death: the day being come, she goeth earely out of her house, mounted on an horse or elephant, or else on a stage carried by eight men: apparelled like to a Bride adorned with iew∣ells, and her haire about her shoulders; holding in her left hand a Looking-Glasse; in the right, an arrow: and singeth as shee passeth through the Citie, saying; That shee goeth to sleepe with her husband. Shee is accompanied with her friends, vntill it bee one or two of the clock in the afternoone: then they goe out of the citie passing by the riuers side to the burning-place, where is prepared a great square Caue full of wood. Heere is made a great banket, the woman eating with ioy, as if it were her wedding∣day, and after they sing and daunce till the woman bidde to kindle the fire in the caue; then she leaueth the Feast, and taketh her husbands neerest kinsman by the hand, and goeth with him to the banke of the riuer, where she strippeth her of her clothes and iewells, bestowing them at her pleasure, and couering her selfe with a cloth, throw∣eth her selfe into the riuer, saying; O wretches, wash away your sinnes. Comming out of the water, she rowleth her selfe into a yellow cloth; and againe, taking her husbands

kinsman by the hand, goeth to the said caue, by which is erected a little Pinnacle, on which she mounteth, and there recommendeth her children and kinred to the people. After this, another woman taketh a pot with oyle, and sprinckleth it ouer her head, and therewith annoynteth all her body, and then throweth it into the furnace, the wo∣man going together with the same. Presently after the woman the people throw great peeces of wood into the Caue, so that with those blowes, and the fire, shee is quickely dead: and their great mirth is on a sodaine turned into great lamentation and howling.

When a great man dieth, both his wife and slaues with whom hee hath had carnall copulation, burne themselues together with him. Amongst the baser sort, I haue seene (saith Maister Frederike) the dead man carried to the place of buriall, and there set vp∣right: * 1.191 the woman comming before him on her knees, casteth hir armes about his neck, while a Mason maketh a wall round about them: and when the wall is as high as their neckes; one comming behinde the woman, strangleth her, the workeman presently finishing the wall ouer them; and this is their buriall.

Ludouicus Vertomannus f 1.192 relateth the same funerall rites of Tarnasseri (as in other parts of India) sauing that there fifteene or twenty men in their idolatrous habite, like Deuilles, doe attend on the fire wherein the husband is burned; all the Musicians of the citie solemnizing the funerall pompe: and fifteene days after they haue the like solemnity, at the burnign of the woman, those diuellish fellowes holding fire in their mouthes, and sacrificing to Deumo, and are her intercessors to that deuill for her good intertainement.

The cause of burning the wiues is by some ascribed to their wonted poysonings of their husbands before this Law; g 1.193 by others, that the husband might haue her helpe and comfort in the other world.

In these parts is the City of Saint Thomas or Malepur, where they say Saint Tho∣mas (after he had preached the Gospel to the Indians) was martyred and burned. The Legend which some report of his death, were too tedious to recite: and as little like∣liehood of truth is in that long tale of the miraculous Crucifixes heere sound, related by Osorius, h 1.194 who likewise declareth the rites of those Saint Thomas-Christians, of their Chaldean Pope, Cardinalls, Patriarchs and Bishops; of which in an other place wee shall more fitly speake. On the first day of Iuly Saint Thomas holy-day is celebrated, aswel by the Pagans as Christians: and his Sepulchre is had in deuout estimation both of the Moores, Gentiles, & Christians; each i 1.195 pretending the right of his own Religion to the Church, where this Saint lieth interred, to which the Indian Christians goe on pilgrimage, carrying with them a litle of that earth for a great relike. A Moore had the keeping of the Church, which was built after our fashion, and begged of the commers for maintenance of it, and of a Light continually burning therein.

The Portugalls k 1.196 now inhabite this Towne almost desolate: the Iesuits also haue heere a residence. The Church-doores (by the superstition of some) are almost cut in peeces, and carried away to set in gold and siluer, and to weare about their neckes, as a holy relike; the Portugalles heerein being exceedingly vaine, and attributing here∣unto many miracles, verifying that Prouerb which the Spaniards vse, affirming the Portugals to be l 1.197 Pocos sotos devotos. One sent Linschoten a whole bead-roll or payre of Beads therof, the bringer affirming that those beads had calmed a tempest miracu∣lously by the way. The Inhabitants in this respect haue driuen their Church-doores full of nailes: but Saint Thomas bones are now remoued to Goa. Those doores are of such renowened holinesse, because they were made of that wood which Saint Tho∣mas drew with his girdle out of the hauen (which it choaked) and could not before •••••• be remoued

Odoricus m 1.198 telleth of a strange and vncouth Idoll, as bigge as Saint Christopher, or pure golde, with a new band about the necke full of precious stones, some one where∣of was of valew (if he valewed iustly) more then a whole kingdome: The roofe, paue∣ment, and seeling of the walles, within and without the Temple, was all gold. The Indians went thither on pilgrimage, some with halters about their neckes, some with

their hands bound behinde them, some with kniues sticking on their armes and legs; and if after their pilgrimage, the wounded flesh seftered, they esteemed that limbe holie, and a signe of their Gods fauour. Neere to the Temple was a lake whereinto he Pilgrimes cast golde, siluer, and gemmes for honour of the Idole, and reparation of his Temple. At euery yearely feast the King and Queene with the Pilgrimes and people assembling, placed the said Idoll in a rich Charriot, and with a solemne pro∣session of Virgins two and two in a rancke singing before him, and with musicall In∣struments carry him forth. Many Pilgrims put themselues vnder the charriot-wheels, where they are crushed in peeces. More then fiue hundred persons vsed thus to doe, whose carkasses were burned, and ashes kept for holie reliques. Otherwise also they will deuore themselues to such a martyrdome in this manner. The parents and friends assemble and make a feast to this Votary, and after that hang fiue sharpe kniues about his necke, and so carry him before the Idole, where he taketh one of his kniues, and crieth; For the worship of my God I cut this my flesh; and cutting a peece, casteth it at the face of the Idole, and so proceeding, at the last saith; Now doe I yeelde my selfe to death in the behalfe of my God; and being dead, is burned as before.

Our Countrey-man n 1.199 sir Iohn Mandeuile reporteth the same Historie of their Idoll Procession, and the ashes of those voluntary Martires, which they keepe to defend them against tempests and misfortunes. He also saith, that some Pilgrimes in all their peregrination, not once lifted vp their eye-liddes, some at euery third or fourth pace fell downe on their knees to worship, some whipped, others wounded themselues; yea, and killed themselues (as is before said.) Nicholao di Conti o 1.200 reporteth the same in his time.

Neither is this bloudy custome yet lest, as Linscboten p 1.201 affirmeth by report of one of his Chamber-fellowes that had seene it. They haue (saith hee) a waggon, or cart, so heauie, that three or foure Elephants can hardly draw it, which is brought forth at Faires, Feasts, and Processions. At this Cart hang many Cables or Ropes, whereat all the people hale and pull, of deuotion. In the vpper part of the Cart standeth a Ta∣bernacle, and therein the Idole: vnder it sit the Kings wiues playing on Instruments. And while the Procession passeth, some cut peeces of their flesh, and throw at the Pagode, some lay themselues vnder the wheeles of the cart, with such euent as you haue heard.

Gasp••ro Balby relateth the same, and addeth, that the Priests, which haue care of this Idol, and certaine women, are conscrated to these deuotions from their Cradles by their zeale-blinde parents. q 1.202 And the women prostitute their bodies, to gaine for the Idole whatsoeuer they can get ouer and aboue their owne maintenance. This fil∣leth the Citie with strumpets; there being of this Sacred (you may interprete it Cur∣sed) crue, foure hundred in one place of the Citie. These haue their place in the Idol-Procession, some of them in the Charriot which is drawne by men; euerie one ac∣compting himselfe happy, that can touch or draw the same. This he saith was at Ne∣gapaton.

He further affirmeth, that not farre from the Citie of Saint Thomas is the Towne Casta: where the wife is not burned (as at Negapatan) but a great graue being made for the deceased husband, they place the liuing wife by the dead corpse, and their neerest kindred cast earth vpon them both, and stampe thereon. They which marrie, wed in their owne degree, as a Smith to Smiths daughter; and they powre out their prayers at the Image of some Cowe, or a Serpent called Bittia di capella. Their Bra∣mine ••burne Cowes-doung; and if they intend any warres with other Nations, they annoynt their nose and forehead with those ashes, not washing themselues till the e∣uening. They which haue sacrificed themselues to the Pagode, when they haue wal∣•••••• arrowes, and diuersly mangle themselues; at last, cutting their owne throats, so sa∣crificing themselues to the Pagode.

There are also certaine people called Amouchi, otherwise Chiavi, which percei∣uing

the end of their life to r 1.203 approch, lay hold on their weapons, which they call Chisse and going forth, kill euery man they meete with, till some body (by killing them) make an end of their killing. They are loth (it seemes) to come into the deuills pre∣sence empty-handed, or to goe to Hell alone. Some of them worship GOD in the likenesse of a Man; some in the Images of Kine and Scrpents: some inuoke the Sunne and Moone; others, some Tree or Riuer.

Among many Feasts which they celebrate in the yeare, one in Autumne is most so∣lemne, in which they take some great tree, and fasten it in the ground, hauing first fa∣shioned it like a mast of a ship, with a crosse-yard, whereon they hang two hooks of yron. And when any one by sicknes, or other misery, hath made a vow to their Idoll or Pagode, he commeth thither, & being first admonished by the Priests to offer his sa∣crifice, they lift him with those hooks by both the shoulders, and there hold him to the Idol, till he hath 3.times saluted the same, with clapping his folded hands to his breast, and hath made some sport thereto with weapons which he hath in his hand. After this he is let downe, and the bloud which issueth from his shoulders is sprinckled on the tree, in testimonie of his deuotion. Then they draw him vp againe by the middle, to giue thankes to the Idoll: and then giue him leaue to heale himselfe, if he can. They which are in great miserie, or seeke some great matter at the hand of their Idoll, doe this. They haue an other Feast, celebrated in the night, continuing eight nights: in which many candles are seene burning through the City. Three or foure runne from one end of the streete to the other, and hurling rice, and other meates after them, say, they offer it to the deuill which followes them; not daring to looke behinde, lest hee should slay them.

In other places also they haue those idoll-chariots, like vnto Towers, to the draw∣ing whereof, many thousands of deuout persons put their helping-hand. Francis s 1.204 Fernandes saith, that Cidambaran is the mother-city of their Pagan-rites, wherein are many stately Temples, and the reuenue of the Bramenes amounted to thirty thou∣sand ducats, but now they are payd but twelue thousand yearely.

Heere happened a strange accident, the same day the Iesuites departed, which was this. There is in this City a Temple of Perimal, wherein they worship an Ape called Hanimant, whom they report to haue beene a GOD, and (for I know not what) to∣gether with many thousands of other gods, to haue remained there, being all trans∣formed into Apes. Now when this principall Ape was forced to passe into the Iland Zeilan, and wanted a ship, he leaped, and at euery leape left an Iland or heape of land behinde him, so making way for his apish traine to Zeilan. The tooth of this Ape was kept for a great relique in that Iland with great resort of Pilgrimes thereunto: and in the yeare t 1.205 1554. was by the Portugalls, (who made a roade thither, in hope of great bootie) taken away. The Indian Princes offered the Viceroy three hundred thousand (or as Linschoten telleth, seuen hundred thousand) ducats, for the ransome of this Apes tooth, but the Archbishop dissuaded the Viceroy; who thereupon burnt the same be∣fore those Indian Embassadours, and threw the ashes into the Sea. Not long after, a Benian•• of Cambaia perswaded the Indians, that hee by Diuine power had taken away that holy tooth being inuisibly present, and had left another in the roome which was burnt. Superstition is credulous, and the King of Bisnagar gaue him a great summe of gold for that Apes tooth, wherewith hee thus apishly had bitten and mocked them, which was after holden in like veneration as the former. But to returne to our Ci∣dambaran History.

They u 1.206 tell, that a holy man, in great penance, had many yeares held his foote pierced through with a peece of yron; and when hee was often by GOD commaun∣ded to leaue that selfe-rigour, he flatly refused, vnlesse that hee might see GOD dauncing about him, which also he condiscended vnto; and with the Sunne, Moone and Starres, which played the Musicians, he appeared dauncing. And as he daunced, a Chaine of gold fell from his foote, whereof this Towne tooke name. For Cidam∣baran signifieth a golden Chaine.

Now at this time * 1.207 there was a great contention, whether the signe of Perimal should be erected in the Temple of Cidambacham. This signe was a gilded mast, with an Ape at the foote thereof. Many Embassadours were there about this quarrel; somevrging, some resisting this deed. But the Prince (called the Naicho of Gingi) would haue it set vp, not withstanding the Priests greatest vnwillingnesse. The priests therefore both regular (which are the Iogues) and secular Bramenes ascended vp the roofe of the Church, and thence threatned to hurle downe themselues, which twen∣ty of the Iogues did, and the rest threatned to follow. But the Naicho caused gunnes to be discharged at them, which slew two, and caused the rest to retire and breake their couenant, rather then their neckes, with their fellowes. A woman also of this faction cut her owne throat for zeale of this new superstition. The swelling stile of this king of Bisnagar I thought worthy to be heere inserted, which is this. x 1.208 The husband of good fortune, the God of great Prouinces, King of the greatest Kings, and God of Kings, the Lord of horsemen, the Maister of them which can not speake, Empe∣rour of three Emperours, Conquer our of all hee sees, and Keeper of all he conquers, dreadfull ••••••the eights coasts of the World, vanquisher of the Mahumetans, &c. Lord of the East, west, North, and South, and of the Sea, &c. Vencapat adinus Ragiu Denamaganus Ra∣gel, which now ruleth and gouerneth this world.

With the Naicho or King of Gingi (vassall to the King or Emperour of Bisnagar) the: Iesuites found good entertainement. Heere some of the Iogues distributed the wa∣ter of Ganges out of certaine vessells couered with sowle and filthy clothes, which yet the people for deuotion kissed. These Iogues with admirable patience endured the Sunnes heate: and one among the rest inclosed himselfe in an yron Cage, with his head and feete onely out of the Cage, that hee could neither sit nor lie downe at any time: and on the Cage were hanged a hundred Lampes, which foure other Iogues his companions lighted at certaine times. And thus walked hee in this his perpetuall pri∣son, as a Light vnto the world in his vaine-glorious opinion. They reasoned with certaine Bramenes; some of which held the Sunne for God, and yet sometime to haue beene a man, and for his merites so promoted. Some denyed a multitude of Gods, onely allowing that priuiledge to Pyrama, Vidhun, and Vnitir, one of which Maketh, an other keepeth, the third destroyeth all things.

Neare to Madure is an idole called Chocanada: which by night appeared in Visi∣on to a Priest, and bade him goe say to the Naicho of Madure, that hee or I must a∣bide in this house: whereupon hee would not be corriuall with his Idole, but resig∣ned the Pallace to him. His deuotion is such, that euery day while he fitteth in iudge∣ment, a Bramene euer and anon soundeth the name of Aranganassa in his eares: and when one is wearie, another succeedeth in the same office, neuer ceasing this Idols remembrance, although he there fitteth fiue or fix houres.

I thought meete to mention one Custome y 1.209 which some report of the Brama, or Pope-like Bramene in these parts, who by his authoritie dispenseth with many of their Lawes, and dis••olueth Marriages: giuing libertie at his pleasure to the women to mar∣ry an other; which his dispensation is sealed on her right shoulder, with a marke of a hote yron.

Chandagrin is the royall seate of the great King of Bisnagar z 1.210 The chiefe Fami∣lies therein are the Bramenes, Raius, and Cretius. They affirme that their Idole Peri∣••all did bring forth the first out of his head (as the Poets tell of Minerua;) the se∣cond out of his breast; the third out of his belly: and all other inferiour Families out of his feete. The Bramenes haue some opinions, not altogether dissonant from the Scriptures. They say, that GOD onely by his thought made a man, which they call Adam.

On the tenth day of Iuly Anno 1600. happened an Eclipse of the Sunne, which the Bramenes said was by meanes of the Dragon (which they make a celestiall signe) his biting of the Sunne and Moone: whereupon the King and others neither eate nor dranke that day; deploring their misery, because the Dragon deuoured the Sunne. In the City Prepeti, three miles from Chandegrin is the feast of Perimall, in remem∣brance

of his marriage: at which the offerings amounted to two hundred thousand crownes: and the Charriot of the idoll was drawne forth a mile and halfe in Processi∣on by tenne thousand men. They haue an other Feast of the Kine, because they sup∣pose Perimal to be the sonne of a Cowe, and then the wayes and streetes are full b 1.211 of that cattell. They haue a feast in honour of the Sunne, which lasteth eight dayes, so∣lemnized by the Emperour himselfe, and he is iudged a traitour which is not present thereat. Then they castlots, the King first, and after the rest, diuining by arrowes the next yeares destinie. If an arrow light on a tree, and being plucked out causeth a red liquor to follow, it prognosticateth warres; if white, peace. Not farre hence is an Idoll called Tripiti, to which are great Pilgrimages and Offerings; alwayes as they goe, some beginne, and the rest answere, and so all continue to resound the name of the Idoll Goia. Before they enter into the Temple, they shaue and wash themselues. They haue Heremites which they call Sanasses, who liue in deserts, and at some times appeare before the people naked. They haue others which they call Gurupi, learned Priests, (as it were a degree of Doctors) which beare a great port, and neuer goe forth on foote. The Idoll Tripiti is seated on a mountaine, about which are fertile valleys; stored with fruits, which none may touch, as being consecrated. There are in the woods great abundance of Apes, so tame, that they will take meat out of mens hands: the people esteeme them a diuine race, and of the familiaritie of Perimal the chiefe God, whom they worship in many colours and shapes, as of a man, oxe, horse, lion, hogge, ducke, cocke, &c.

As Veiga b 1.212 and Ricius; two Iesuites, trauelled to Chaudegrin, they came to Tra∣vilur, where they sawe their Idoll, with a white banner on his backe, and after him three sacred kine, with Drummers on their backes, and after them Trumpetters and many Musicians of other sorts. Then followed thirrie women dauncing, which were also consecrated to the Idolles seruice, and might not marry, but vet prostitute their bodies: these were richly attired, and carried Lights. The Priests followed with the Idoll, and were followed by the people with Lights. At their returne they set downe the Idoll, and set sodden rice before him to eate; others meane while driuing away the flies; and others couering him that hee should not be seene eating: and at last, one maketh a long Oration of the worthy acts of their God, and then set him a∣gaine in his place. This lasted foure houres; and in the mean space many reasoned with the Iesuites, and some held vaine Discourses of the Creation: as, that there were seuen Seas; one of salt-water, the second of fresh, the third of honey, the fourth of milke, the fift of Tair (which is creame beginning to sowre) the sixt of sugar, the seuenth of butter: that the Earth had nine corners, whereby it was borne vp by the Heauen. O∣thers dissented, and said, that the Earth was borne vp by seuen Elephants; the Ele∣phants feete stood on Tortoises, and they were borne by they knew not what.

When the Naicho of Tangaor c 1.213 died, three hundred of his Concubines willingly offered themselues to the fire, to honour his funerall; so much can Custome harden so delicate and soft-hearted a nature.

The Temples d 1.214 in this Countrey haue great reuenues, which in some places are encreased by the deuotion of women, which prostitute themselues to gaine for their Idoles: and many yong girles are brought vp for this purpose. Many are here in these parts, of the Sect of the Guzzarats, which kill no quicke thing, as is spoken e 1.215 Some haue a stone hanging about their neckes, as big as an egge, with certaine lines drawn through the middle thereof; and this they worship, and call it Tambarane: they keep euery Friday holiday.

The kingdom of Orissa hath on the sea-coast three hundred and fifty miles, betwixt the richer kingdoms of Bengala and Bisnagar, poore of ports and traffike. Raman f 1.216 is the royall city; from whence the riuer Ganga passeth, and at his fall into the Sea ioy∣neth his waters with those of Ganges. The Inhabitants (except a few Moores) are Gentiles, little or nothing (that I can learne) differing in rites from their neighbours, of which yee haue heard. Some g 1.217 ascribe to the Citie Orissa, as the name, so the prin∣cipalitie of the other Cities of this kingdome.

One thing I thought not to omit: That there be h 1.218 whole Villages and kindreds of people, in other things like to other men, but are borne with one of their legges and one foot from the knee downewards, as thicke as an Elephants legge; which the com∣mon people imagine to be a curse by Diuine iustice, inflicted vpon the whole Gene∣ration, for that their Progenitours murthered Saint Thomas. Linschoten saith, he hath seene and spoken with them, and could learne no other cause thereof. It is to them a deformitie, but no let or impediment otherwise.

And thus haue we finished our perambulation of the Continent of Asia. Now let vs ship our selues ouer (for we are not skilful of Hanimants leapes) vnto the Ilands: hauing first feasted you with the fruits and other rarities of Nature in Indie.

CHAP. XII.

Of the Creatures, Plants, and Fruits in India.

OF the Elephant and Rhinoceros is alreadie spoken: and of diuers o∣thers of their beasts. The Elephant is of great vse both for Warre and Peace. When the keeper employeth him in any burthen, he getteth first on his necke, and putteth his feet vnder the beasts eares, hauing a hooke in his hand, which he sticketh aboue betweene his eares, where his stones lie: they binde the burthen with a rope, which at his keepers bidding he taketh in his mouth, and windeth it about his teeth, and so draw∣eth the packe after him. The Elephants are said to keepe themselues chastly to one fe∣male, which is thought to bring forth in a yeare and halfe or two yeares. a 1.219 Christopho∣rus Acosta, Linschoten, and other moderne Authors, as also Aristotle, Pliny, Aelian and others of the Ancient, relate strange reports of the Elephant. For the Readers de∣light I will mention some. An Elephant being weary, hasted home; his keeper after much entreatie not preuailing, told him it was for the King of Portugalls seruice, which he would haue him doe: the beast answering hoo, hoo (which in the Malabar language signifieth I will, I will, as Acosta interpreteth) fulfilled his request. The same Elephant wanting his meat; his master said it was because his kettle wherein he vsed to boile it was broken, and therefore willed him to carry it to the Tinker; which he did, and brought it againe, but ill-mended: whereupon he was sent againe, and the Tinker to trie him, amended it worse. The Elephant carries it to the riuer which ranne by, to see if it would hold water, and finding it to runne, came back with great noise and an∣ger: the Tinker entreats pardon, and at the third time doth it well; which yet the Ele∣phant would not beleeue, till by triall he saw it held water, and then shewing it to the standers by that it would hold, carried it home. A souldiour hurled a Coco-shell at an Elephant: which (because he could not then repay it) put the shell in his mouth, and a few daies after seeing him in the street, at Cochin, he hurled the same out of his mouth at the souldiour againe. Another souldiour iniured the keeper of an Elephant, which would haue reuenged the wrong, but was forbidden by his said keeper: but after e∣spying the souldiour, when his keeper was absent; he took him vp in his trunke & duc∣ked him diuers times in the water, & then set him downe where he had taken him vp. They are very ambitious. One being vpbraided of lazines by his keeper, when as his burthen was too heauie for him to draw, and therefore they had brought another Ele∣phant to help him; disdaining a companion, thrust him away, & drew himselfe dead in the place. Another in like case fell on his fore-legs, & wept at his keepers chiding, and although he admitted a cōpanion till the greater difficultie was ouercome, yet feeling it thē in his own power to draw, he put away the other Elephāt with his head & teeth, to recouer his credit. Of the admirable capacitie, gratitude, and other qualities of this beast, were tedious to recite. An ample testimony hereof, is the example of the King of Aua his Elephant before mentioned. Of the Rhinoceros I haue little further to say: as of other beasts tame & wilde, which Nature yeeldeth in other places as well as here.

As for fowles, they haue abundance of Parrots, & Noyras, more pleasing in beautie,

speech and other delights then the Parrot, but cannot be brought out of that countrey aliue. Of Bats as bigge as Hennes, about Iaua and the neighbour Ilands, we haue al∣readie spoken. Clusius b 1.220 bought one, of the Hollanders, which they brought from the Iland of Swannes, Ilha do Cerne, newly stiled by them Maurice Iland; it was aboue a foote from the head to the taile, aboue a foot about, the wings one and twentie in∣ches long, nine broad, the claw whereby it hung on the trees, was two inches, the pisle easily seene, &c. Heere c 1.221 they also found a fowle which they called Walgh-vogel, of the bignesse of a Swanne, and most deformed shape.

In d 1.222 Banda and other Ilands, the bird called Emia or Eme, is admirable. It is foure foot high, somewhat resembling an Ostrich, but hauing three clawes on the feet, and the same exceeding strong: it hath two wings rather to helpe it running, then seruice∣able for flight: the legges great and long: they c 1.223 say it hath no tongue, and that it put∣teth out the pisle backwards, as the Camell: that it deuoureth Oranges and Egges, rendring the same in the ordure, nothing altered.

Of the birds of Paradise, elsewhere is shewed the falsehood of that opinion, which conceiue them to want feet, whereas they goe as other birds, but being taken, the bo∣die (for the most part) together with the feet are cut off, and they being dried in the Sunne, is so hardened and closed, as if Nature had so formed them. This is testified by f 1.224 Pigafetta, and the Hollanders. Of this, Clusius in his Auctarium hath a large Dis∣course, shewing diuers kinds of them, a greater and a lesse: and saith that Iobin de Wee∣ly of Amsterdam sold one of them, which had feet, to the Emperour, 1605. But I would not herein be tedious. Of the birds and beasts of India, Acosta, Linschot••n, Cin∣sius, besides Gesner and others can informe the studious.

They haue Crowes so bold, that they will come flying in at the windowes, and take the meat out of the dish, as it standeth on the table before them that are set thereat: and are such vexatiō to the Bussles, that they are forced to stand in waters vp to the necks, that they may be rid of them. They haue Rats, which the Cats dare not touch, as big as yong Pigges, which vndermine the foundations of houses in such sort with their dig∣gings, that they sometimes fall to the ground. There are other little red Rats, which smell like muske. Incredible is the scathe which they receiue in Goa by the Pismires, which with such huge multitudes will presently assaile any thing that is fatty, or to be eaten, that they are forced to set their cup-boords and chests, wherein are their victu∣alls and apparell, with a woodden cisterne of water vnder euery of their foure feete, and that in the middle of the roome. And if they forget to haue water in the cisterne, presently these Ants are all ouer, and in the twinckling of an eye (saith Linschoten) they will consume a loafe of bread. The like cisternes haue they for their beds and tables: and for the pearches wheron they set their Canary birds, which els would be killed by Pis∣mires, yea though it hung on a string frō the roofe of the house. The poorer sort which want cup-bords, hang their fragments in a cloth on the wall, hauing a circle of char∣coales about it; with this wall to keepe out this small creature, and great enemy. There are other Ants almost a finger long, and reddish, which doe great harme to fruits and plants. Great is the harme which Moths and Wormes doe in mens cloths and bookes, which can very hardly be kept from them. But more hurtful is the Baratta, which flieth and is twice as bigge as a Bee, from which nothing almost can be kept close enough, and are to be esteemed as a plague among them like to the Pismires, and are common∣ly in all fat wares and sweet meats, and when they come vpon apparell they leaue their staining egges behind.

The Salamander is said g 1.225 to be common in the Ile of Madagascar. Of Serpents h 1.226 they haue diuers kinds and very venemous, besides one other kind as big as a Swine, which is destitute of poison, & hurteth only by biting. But the superstitiō of the King of Cale∣cut multiplieth their serpents. For he causeth cottages to be set vp to keep thē from the raine, and maketh it death to whomsoeuer that shall kill a Serpent or a Cow. They think Serpēts to be heauēly spirits, because they can so suddēly kil men. So much hath that old Serpēt, both at first & since, deluded mē by this venemous creature. There i 1.227 are hogs with horns in the Moluccas••in Celebes & Mindanao are hogs, which bendes the

teeth they haue in their mouthes, haue other two growing out of their snouts, and as many behind their eares of a large spanne and halfe in length.

Of fish they haue great plentie and varietie. They haue of Hayens or Tuberons which deuoure men, especially such as fish for pearles. And others bath themselues in cisternes, not daring to aduenture the riuers for them. Of fish-monsters like men, and like an hogge some write: and as monstrous is that, which Maffans k 1.228 telleth of a Whale, which with the opposition of his huge bodie, stayed the course of a shippe sayling with eight other shippes into India, with so great a noise and shaking, as if they had fallen on a rocke. Neither could the windes, which filled the sailes, further her course. The Marriners, when they saw two elements of Wind and Current, so strongly encountring, looked out and saw this monster, with her finnes embracing the sides of the shippe, and enterlacing the sterne with her taile, applying her bodie to the keele, which contained about l 1.229 eightie foot in length. They thought presently that some hellish fiend had beene sent to deuoure them; and consulting of remedie, at last sent out their Priest in his holy vestments, with crosses and exorcismes: who (like the greater diuell) preuailed with these weapons, and the Whale forsooke them with∣out further hurt.

There are m 1.230 certaine fish-shells, like Scalop-shells, found on the shore; so great that two strong men with a leauer can scarse draw one of them after them. They haue fish within them. A shippe (called Saint Peter) fell vpon sands, sailing from Cochin, and split. The men saued themselues, and of the wood of the old shippe built a Caruell, wherein to get to the Continent, but in the meane while were forced to make a sconse, and by good watch to defend themselues from certaine Crabbes of exceeding greatnesse, and in as great numbers, and of such force, that whomsoeuer they got vnder their clawes, it cost him his life, as two Marriners of the same shippe told mee.

Crabbes heere with vs haue a sympathy with the Moone, and are fullest with her fulnes: in India there is a contrary antipathy, for at a full Moone they are emptiest.

They haue Oysters, in which the Pearles are found, which are fished for by duckers, that diue into the water, at least ten, twenty or thirty fathom. These men are naked, and haue a basket bound at their backes, which, being at the bottome, they rake full of Oysters and durt together, and then rise vp and put them into boats. They lay them after on the land, where the Sunne causeth, them to open, and then they take out some∣time many, sometime few Pearles, as each Oyster yeeldeth, which is sometimes two hundred graines and more. The King hath one part; the souldiers, a second; the Ie∣suits, a third; and the fishers themselues the fourth: a small recompence for so great a danger, in which many men euery fishing-time lose their liues. The Hollanders found Tortoises so great, that ten men might sit and dine within one of the shells.

Of their fruits, Ananas is reckoned n 1.231 one of the best: In taste like an Apricocke, in shew a farre off, like an Artichoke, but without prickles, very sweet of sent. It was first brought out of the West-Indies hither. Iacas are bigger then the former, and grow out of the bodie of the tree: they are of many pleasant tastes, but hard, to digest. Of Mangas there are three forts, they are as bigge as goose egges. The first sort hath stones, which the second wanteth. The third is poison so deadly, that yet no remedie hath beene found against it. Of the like bignesse is the Caions, of which, of the Iam∣bos, Iangomas, Carambolas, Iambolij••s, Papaios, &c. I leaue to speake, as not writing an Indian Herball, but onely minding to mention such things, which, besides their countrey, haue some varietie of nature, worthie the obseruation. For the rest, Garcias ab Horto translated by Carolus Cl••sius, Paludanus, Linschoten, Christophorus, Acosta writing particularly of these things) and others in their generall Herballs, may ac∣quaint you.

Of this sort is the Indian Fig-tree; if it may may be called a tree, which is not a∣boue a mans height, and within like to a reed, without any woodie substance: it hath leaues a fathom long, and three spans broad, which open and spread abroad on the top of it, It yeeldeth the fruit in fashion of the clusters of grapes, & beareth but one bunch

at once, containing some two hundred figges at least, which being ripe, they cut the whole tree downe to the ground, leauing only the root, out of which presently grow∣eth another, and within a moneth after beareth fruit, and so continueth all the yeare long. They are the greatest sustenance of the countrey, and are of very good taste, and smell, and in those parts men beleeue that Adam first transgressed with this fruit.

But of greater admiration is the o 1.232 Coquo-tree, being the most profitable tree in the world, of which in the Ilands of Maldiua they make and furnish whole shippes: so that (saue the men themselues) there is nothing of the shippe or in the shippe, neither tackling, merchandize, or ought else but what this tree yeeldeth. The tree groweth high and slender, the wood is of a spungie substance, easie to be sowed, when they make vessells thereof, with cords made of Cocus. For this nut (which is as bigge as an Estridge egge) hath two sorts of huskes, as our Walnuts, whereof the vppermost is hairy (like hempe) whereof they make Occam and Cordage, of the other shell they make drinking-cuppes. The fruit, when it is almost ripe, is full of water within; which by degrees changeth into a white harder substance, as it ripeneth. The liquor is very sweet, but with the ripening groweth sowre. The liquor extracted out of the tree is medicinable; and if it stand one houre in the Sunne, it is very good vineger, which be∣ing distilled, yeeldeth excellent Aqua-vitae, and wine. Of it also they make, by setting it in the Sunne, Sugar. Of the meat of the nut dried, they make oyle. Of the pith or heart of the tree, is made paper for bookes and euidences. Of the leaues they make couerings for their houses, mattes, tents, &c. Their apparell, their firing, and the rest of the commodities which this tree (more plentifull in the Indies, then willowes in the Low-Countries) yeeldeth, would be too tedious to recite. They will keepe the tree from bearing fruit, cutting away the blossomes, and then will hang some vessell there∣at, which receiueth frō thence that liquor, of which you haue heard. It is the Canarijns liuing, & they wil clime vp these trees, which yet haue no boughes, but on the top, like apes. This tree hath also a continuall succession of fruits, and is neuer without some.

No lesse wonder doth that tree p 1.233 cause, which is called Arbore derais, or the tree of roots: Clusius calleth it (by Plinies authoritie) the Indian fig-tree: and Goropius (with more confidence, then reason) affirmeth it to be the tree of Adams transgression. It groweth out of the ground, as other trees, and yeeldeth many boughes, which yeeld certaine threads of the colour of gold, which growing downewards to the earth, doe there take roote againe, making as it were new trees, or a wood of trees, couering by this meanes the best part sometimes of a mile: in which the Indians make galleries to walke in: The figs are like the common, but not so pleasant.

The Arbore triste q 1.234 deserueth mention: It growes at Goa, brought thither (as is thought) from Malacca: The Hollanders saw one at Acri in Samatra. In the day-time and at Sunne setting, you shall not see a flower on it: but within halfe an houre after, it is full of flowers, which at the Sunne-rising fall off; the leaues shutting themselues from the Sunnes presence, and the tree seeming as if it were dead.

And that yee may know the Indians want not their Metamorphoses and Le∣gends, they tell that a man, named Parisatico, had a daughter, with whom the Sunne was in loue; but lightly forsaking her, he grew amorous of another: whereup∣on this Damosell slew her selfe, and of the ashes of her burned carcasse came this tree.

Bettele r 1.235 is a leafe somewhat like a Bay-leafe, and climeth like Iuie, and hath no o∣ther fruit: neither is any fruit more in vse then these leaues: at bed and boord, and in the streets as they passe, they chew these leaues; and in their gossippings or visiting of their friends, they are presently presented with them; and eate them with Arecca, which is a kinde of Indian nut. It saueth their teeth from diseases, but coloureth them as if they were painted with blacke bloud. When they chew it, they spit out the iuice, and it is almost the onely exercise of some, which thinke they could not liue, if they should abstaine one day from it.

They hane an hearbe called Dutro••, which causeth distraction, without vn∣derstanding any thing done in a mans presence: sometimes it maketh a man

sleep as if he were dead the space of foure and twentie houres, except his feete bee washed with cold water, which restoreth him to himselfe; and in much quantity it kil∣leth. The women giue their husbands thereof, and then in their sights will prostitute their bodies to their lewder louers, and will call them Cornudo, stroking them by the beard: the husband sitting with his eyes open, grinning like a foole, and when he re∣turneth to himselfe, knoweth nothing but that he hath slept.

Another strange hearbe is called Sentida, or feeling, for that if any passe by it, and toucheth it, or throweth sand or any thing else on it, presently it becommeth as if it were withered, and closeth the leaues; so continuing as long as the man standeth by; but so soone as he is gone, openeth fresh and faire: and touching it againe, it wi∣thereth as before.

But the strangest plant (for so may we terme it) is, that at Goa the hornes of beasts slaughtered are throwne together in one place, lest they should be occasion of indig∣nation and reproch to any; the shewing or naming of a horne being there ominous. These hornes thus cast forth, after a certaine time, take roote, and the rootes grow two or three spannes in length.

Pepper (whereof there are diuers forts) groweth at the foot of Arecea, or some other tree, on which it climeth, as Bettele or Iuie; growing in bunches like grapes.

Cinamom s 1.236 is the inner barke of a tree as big as an Oliue; with leaues like bay-leaues, and fruit like an Oliue: The drying of the barke maketh it roll together. Within three yeares after, the tree yeeldeth another barke, as before. In Seylon is the best. They of Ormuz call it Darchini, that is, wood of China: and selling it at Alexandria, call it t 1.237 Cinnamemum.

Ginger * 1.238 groweth like yong reeds, or Gladiolus, with a roote like a Lilly: it is plen∣tifull in Malabar.

Cloues * 1.239 grow in the Moluccos on trees, like Bay-trees, yeelding blossomes, first white, then greene (at which time they yield the pleasantest smell in the world) and last of all red and hard which are the Cloues. They are so hot of nature, that if a paile or tub of water should stand in the chamber, when they clense them, or any vessell of wine or of her moisture, in two dayes the Cloues would sucke it out and drie it. The same na∣ture is in the vnspunne silke of China.

The Nutmegge-tree, u 1.240 is like a Peach or Peare-tree, and groweth most in Banda and Iaua. The fruit is like a Peach, the inner part whereof is the Nutmeg, which is couered and interlaced with the Mace or Flowre, and ouer that, is the fruit like a Peach, as I haue seene them conserued. When the fruit is ripe, the first and outermost part ope∣neth, as it is with our Walnuts, then the Mace flourisheth in a faire red colour, which in the ripening becommeth yellow.

It were an endles••e peece of worke, and not so pertinent to our purpose, to speake of the rest of the spices, drugges, and fruits in India: These (as the rarest or cheese) I haue chosen so (as it were) to recreate our Reader with a walke, and howres-view in this Indian Garden, being before full cloyed with our tedious narrations of their supersti∣tions. I might adde heere a discourse of Gemmes, as Diamonds, Rubies, Emeralds, &c. But it becommeth not my pouertie to talke so much of Iewels. The greatest ver∣tue in any which I haue read of, was of that which Osorius x 1.241 saith, would not suffer a droppe of bloud to fall from him that ware it, who yet, without losse of bloud, was flaine by a great wound: and this Iewell was lost by shippe-wracke, when it should haue beene sent to Portugall for a present to the King. He which had this Iewell, as called N••hodaheguea, a Prince of Samotra, which was killed in his shippe; and the Portugalls ri••••ing him, found no bloud about him, till they had taken from him a chaine of gold, in which this stone was inclosed, and then hee bled fresh∣ly This stone is taken out of certaine beastes, which the Siamites call Cabri∣sias. The y 1.242 Bezar-stones are likewise taken out of the maw of a Persian or Indian Goat, which the Persians call Pa••••r. And in the Countrey of Pan, by Malacca, they finde within the gall of an Hogge a stone, of greater force against poyson and other diseases, then that Pazar-stone. It is thought that

these stones doeproceed of the pasture whereon these beasts feed. The Amber is found as well in other places as in India. Garcias z 1.243 thinkes it to be the nature of the soile, as Chalke, Bole-armenike, &c. and not the seed of the Whale, or issuing from some fountaine in the sea, as others hold. Clusius tels a probable opinion of D. Marel, that it was an excrement gathered in the Whales belly.

Galmano * 1.244 writeth of a small vermine in Sian, which cleaueth fast to the trunke of the Elephant, and thence sucketh out his bloud and life: his skull is so hard that it can∣not be pierced with a hand-gun: and in his liuer is said to be the likenesse of men and women, and he which hath one of them about him, is safe from wounds by iron. He telleth of a tree in Mindanao; the one halfe whereof (which standeth towards the East) is a good remedie against poison: the Westerne halfe yeeldeth the strongest poyson in the world. There is a stone, on which whosoeuer sitteth, shall bee broken in his bodie.

CHAP. XIII.

A gennerall Discourse of the Sea, and of the Ilands ad∣ioyning to Asia.

AFter our long perambulation of the Asian Continent, the sea inuiro∣ning doth sollicite our next endeuours, that the Reader might there refresh his wearied sense, with a new succession of Natures varieties, and humane vanities. And first, while our Barke be made readie to ship vs ouer to some of those Ilands, let vs (as it were on the shore) take view of this, so strong, so weake, so constant, and so vnconstant waterie Element. The Sea is great and wide, saith a 1.245 the Psalmist: and at first couered the whole earth like a garment, till for mans vse b 1.246 the drie land appeared, which for mans abuse was againe in the dayes of Noab couered: And had not GOD c 1.247 set the Sea a bound which it cannot passe, it would returne to couer the Earth for euer. It is his d 1.248 perpetu∣all decree, who commanded, and it was made, that though the waues thereofrage, yet they cannot prenaile; though they roare, yet they cannot passe ouer. For how casie were it for the Sea ••o enclose the Earth in her watery mantle, and againe to make a conquest of the drie Land, hauing such forces of her owne, and such re-enforcements from the Aire, and the Earth it selfe? Her owne powers, euen by order of Nature and proporti∣on of the Elements, cannot but seeme dreadfull: in which, as the Aire exceedeth the Water, and is it selfe exceeded of the Fire; so the Water may seeme no lesse to sur∣mount the Earth, the lowest and least of the Elements. And what armies of exhalati∣ons doth the Sunne daily muster in the great airy plaine, which would succour their mother in such an attempt? Besides that, euen the Earth, as it is euery where compas∣sed of the Sea, doth compasse in it selfe so many Seas, Lakes, Riuers, in the vppermost face thereof, as professed partakers; and the inward bowels thereof haue daily intelli∣gence, and continuall conspiracie with the Waters, by those secret pores and priuy passages, whereby it commeth to passe, that albeit e 1.249 a•••• Riuers runne to the Sea, yet the Sea is not filled. And were it possible that so many Worlds of Waters should daily and hourely flow into this watery World, and that such a World of time together, and yet the Sea nothing encreased, but that (as Salomon there saith) The Riuers goe to the place from whence they returne and goe? that is, they runne into the Sea, and thence, partly by the Sunnes force, eleuated and restored in raines, &c. partly by filling the veincs of the Earth with Springs, doe both wayes returne againe in Riuers to the Sea. This f 1.250 appea∣reth by the Dead Sea, and by the Caspian, which receiue many Riuers without open payment thereof to the Ocean: and at the straits of Gibraltar, the Ocean commonly hath a current in at one end, and the Euxine Sea at the other, besides abundance of o∣ther waters out of Europe, Asia, Africa, and yet is no fuller.

The depth of the Sea is holden by some to hold proportion to the height of the Mountaines on the Earth. The saltnesse of the Sea some ascribe to the first Creati∣on; some, to the Sweat of the Earth, rosted with the Sunne; some, to the saltnesse of the Earth, especially in Minerals of that nature; some, to adust vapours, partly let fall on the Sea, partly raysed from it to the brinkes and face thereof; some, to the moti∣on of the Sea; and some, to the working of the Sunne, which draweth out the purer and finer parts, leauing the grosser and baser behind: as in this little world of our bo∣dies, the purest parts of our nourishment being imployed in, and on the bodie, the vrine, and other excrements remaining, doe retaine a saltnesse. I will not determine this question, as neither that of the ebbing and flowing of the Sea, which ( g 1.251 some say) is the breath of the World; some, the waters in holes of the Earth, forced out by Spi∣rits; some, the meeting of the East and West Ocean: some ascribe it to the Moone, naturally drawing water, as the Load-stone, Iron: some to the variable light of the Moone. A variable light they all giue vs. They that send vs to GOD, and his Decree in Nature, haue said what is the true cause, but not how it is by naturall meanes effe∣cted. Certaine it is, that the Ocean and the Moone are companions in their motion: vncertaine, whether the Ocean hath a naturall power in it selfe, or from the Moone, so to moue. But these things we leaue to Philosophers searching wits, and better ley∣sures. The motion of the Sea is manifold; as first by ebbings and flowings, these also differing, according to the course of the Moone, in Spring, or Nepe-tides, and accor∣ding to the distance, as they are neerer or further from the Ocean, and according to the deepenesse or shallownesse of the places, besides other accidents, ouer-ruling them, making them, in diuerse Seas, to be greater, lesse, or none at all, longer also in some place, or oftener, as in Negropont, where the water is said to rise and fall seuen times a day. And besides these hourely, daily, or monethly motions, another (more generall) is ascribed vnto the Sea, from East to West, proceeding from the motion of the Heauens, which in the openest Seas, as in the Atlantike and South Seas, are apparantly manifest, especially betwixt the Tropickes, where they finde a constant Easterly breath; vncertaine whether it may be tearmed a winde, arising of inferiour exhalations, or some impetuous violence, caused by the superiour motions, which draw together with them the Elements, not of the Fire onely, but also of Ayre and Water. And hence are those strong Currents in di∣uerse places, as that which runneth in at the great Bay, and out againe with like force, betweene Cuba and Florida, causing the Spaniards to goe one way to the In∣dies, and to returne another. Other particular motions in the Sea, proceeding from especiall accidents of the Ayre by windes, which somewhere haue their set seasons; of the Sea by Whirle-pooles, and contrarie currents: of the Land by Capes, Islands, In∣draughts, Riuers, and such like, it would be tedious to relate.

The Sea is commonly diuided into the Mediterranean and Ocean: and vnder that Mid-land appellation are contained all the Seas and Gulfes that are seated within the Land, as the Arabian, Persian, Baltike, Bengalan, and especially such as the Sea of So∣dome and the Caspian, which haue no apparant commerce with the Ocean: but espe∣cially is that Sea called Mediterranean, which entring at the Straits of Gibraltar, is both larger then any of the rest (containing, aboue tenne thousand myles in circuit) and abutteth not on one onely, but on all the parts of the elder World, washing indif∣ferently the shores of Asia, Africke, and Europe.

The Seas beare also the names of the Countries, Cities, Hills, Riuers, and Lands, by which they passe, or of some other accident there happened; as the Atlantike, or Ger∣mane Ocean, the Adriaticke, the Redde, White, or Blacke Seas, the Sea of Ladies, the Euxine by a contrarie appellation, for their inhospitalitie.

But to contract our speech vnto Asia, we finde the Sea prodigall of his best things, and of himselfe vnto it, clasping, with a louely embrace, all this Asian Continent, saue where a little Necke of Land diuides it from Africa; and no great space, together with Tanais, from Europe. Yea, as not herewith satisfying his loue to this Asian Nymph, in many places he insinuates himselfe within the Land by Gulfes or Bayes,

twining his louing armes about some whole Countries: otherwhere (as it were) by hostile vnderminings he maketh Seas farre from the Sea; and especially hath yeel∣ded so many Islands, as rather may seeme admirable then credible. For, to let passe the North parts (as not so well knowne) where Vaygats, Nova Zemla, and the rest, would giue vs but cold entertainement: Comming thence to the East and South, we are encountred with the Island, or h 1.252 Islands rather, bearing the name of Iapan; the principall where of are three: of which more afterwards. These are seconded by the Islands of China, which doe (as it were) hedge and fence it in; of which, there is little in Authors worthie mentioning. In Macao, or Amacan, the Portugalls haue a Colonie, but the chiefe Island of China is Anian, in the Gulfe of Cauchin-China.

Further from the Continent, from Iapan Southwards, are many Islands, called by the names of Lequi••, the greater, and the lesse, rich in Gold: nigh to the same is Her∣mosa: and next to these the Philippinae, so called i 1.253 of Philip the second, King of Spaine, by whose charge and charges they were discouered in the yeare 1564, long after that Magellanus had lost his life in the discouerie of these parts. Some make this name hold some proportion to the Spanish ambition, calling all the Islands Phi∣lippinae, which are betweene New Spaine, and the Gulfe of Bengala, in all, after their account, eleuen thousand. They begin their reckoning at Noua Guin••ae, where first we see Cainam. The next Banda, which name is proper to an Island so called, and common also to her neighbours, Rosolarguin, Ay, Rom, Neyra, in foure degrees to the South, which alone in the world are k 1.254 said, by some, to bring forth Nutmegs and Mace. The men here are Marchants, the women attend to Husbandrie. The Islands del More abound with Rice and Sagu (a fruit which yeeldeth Meale) where l 1.255 are wilde Hennes, which sit not on their egges, but burie them a good depth vnder the sand, where the Sunne hatcheth them. They haue no Kine, but a Fish of like linea∣••••••, which they take in their Nets. Gilolo hath a Mahumetane Prince, and is a great Island; the people are Men-eaters. Amboino is the name of many Islands, rude both in soyle and people, which eate their owne parents when they are olde. Neere to these are the Moluccae, fiue in number, Ternate, Tidor, Motir, Machian, and Bachian, famous through the world, as being Natures Store-house of Cloues. Their worship is directed to the Sunne, Moone, and other heauenly and earthly creatures. The m 1.256 Selebes abound with Gold, abandoned of goodnesse, peopleD with Idolaters and Men-eaters. The Islands of n 1.257 Moratay are more Northerly, where Bat∣tata-rootes is their bread, their neighbours fare in the Islands of Tarrao, Sanguin, So∣lor, and others.

In those Islands, which more properly beare the Philippine title, Mindano is, of very large circuit, and hath diuerse famous Cities: Tendaia, for her excellence, is by some called the Philippina. Luzzon incompasseth a thousand myles, in which the Spaniards haue built a Towne, called Manilia, and haue thither carried Cattell for breede.

Borneo is reputed as bigge as Spaine, richly attended with many Islands of smal∣ler circuit. It hath a Citie of the same name, founded on Piles, in the salt water, with sumptuous buildings of hewed Stone, couered with Coco leaues. The King is a Mahumetan.

The greater Iaua is by Scaliger * 1.258 called an Epitome, or Summe of the World; rich in many Commodities. The Cabal is a wilde Beast in this Island, whose bones doe restraine the bloud from issuing in wounded parties. The South part is Gentiles, as the Countries within the Land; but towards the shore they are Mahumetans. Tou∣ching the lesser Iaua, there is some controuersie which should be it.

Betwixt Malacca and Samatra Nature hath (as it were) sowed that Field of Wa∣ters with Islands; the principall of which is Bintam. Samatra, within the Countrey, is Ethnikes: towards the Coast are Moores; an Island large, rich, and populous, di∣uided into many Kingdomes.

The Gulfe of Bengala is (as it were) garded with a double ranke of Islands, which Neptune hath set as Garisons of those Seas. But these ••ll are not worthie the honour

due to Zeilan, called in old times Taprobana. if they guesse not better which so call Samatra. From thence, alongst the Coast of India, are seene few Islands of any great∣nesse: But further into the Sea are the Maldiva, so called of Maldiva, one of their number, whose name signifieth a thousand Islands; some of which are diuided by lar∣ger Seas, some by smaller Armes; the Ocean somewhere with his greatnesse threate∣ning to swallow them, and in other places as curious of his delightfull search, stea∣ling rather, then forcing a separation, prouoking the passengers to communicate in his sports; who sometimes, helped with some ouer-growing Tree, can leape from one Island to another. Yet hath not Nature, thus diuersifying their situation, yeel∣ded them diuersitie of her riches, sauing that it seemeth here shee hath chosen her chamber for the Palme, or Coquo- Nuts, which in other places she hath, in compa∣rison, but scattered, here stored, that by this store the people might supply all their other wants. Yea, besides the Land-Coquo, there groweth another vnder the water bigger then the former; a speciall Antidote for poyson. The inhabitants are addicted to subtletie and Sorcerie, and in the Islands next to the Continent, Moores beare sway; in the rest, Pagans. Other Islands, of smaller reckoning, we reckon not. Diu hath long beene famous for the warres therein, vainely attempted by the Turke and Indians against the Fortresse of the Portugalls.

The Persian Gulfe hath left some remnants of Land extant; the chiefe is Ormus, a famous Mart, which the Moores there maintained, vnder the gouernment of a Moore, af••er made tributarie to the Portugall; which Nature hath made barren; In∣dustrie, plentifull: the more fertile Element yeelds barrennesse and Sands; the bar∣renner bringeth in a double wealth, Pearles and Merchandise.

In the Discourse of these Asian Seas and this Persian, amongst the rest I thought it worthie relating, which o 1.259 Luys de Vrreta, in his Aethiopian Historie telleth of a certaine Iew. He trauelling alongst the shore of this Persian Sea, by some In•••••• Armes thereof, which embay themselues within the Land, saw the Sea loftie •••••• swelling, by force of the Winds and Tides, seeming to threaten the higher Elements, but euen now readie to swallow vp the Earth, roaring out a loud defiance in such sort, that the poore Iew was amazed, and dreadfully feared therewith: and this continued the space of some dayes, whiles the Iew trauelled thereby. But on the Saturday and Sabbath, Superstition commaunded the Iew; and Nature (the handmaid of Diuinitie) enioyned the angrie Elements to rest; a sudden calme followed, as if waues and winds would accompanie the Iewin his deuotions, and had forgotten their former furie and wonted nature, to remember the sanctification of this day. The Iew hauing heard before, that there was a Sabbaticall R••••er (which some place in Aethiopia, some in Phoenicia, others they cannot tell where) in a credulous fancie persuades himselfe, that this Arme of the Sea was that Sabbaticall streame, & that he now saw the experimēt of that relatiō with his eyes. Fancie had no sooner affirmed, but superstition sware to the truth, & cre∣dulitie tickles him with gratulation of diuine fauor to himself, that had liued to see that blessed sight. Rauished with this conceit, he filles his budget full of the sand, which is of a more grosse and cleauing nature, then in other places, and carrieth it with him as a great treasure vnto the place of his habitation. There he tells his countrey-men that now the Messias would not be long before he came, for now he had found this signe thereof, the Sabbaticall Riuer; shewing this sand in proofe thereof. Credit I••∣d••••us Apella, the Iewes beleeue quickly all but the truth, especially in Portu∣gall, p 1.260 whi∣ther he came with this report. Many thousands moued by his words, remoued their dwellings, and selling their substance, would needs goe into these parts of Petsia, by the Sabbaticall Riuer to fixe their habitation; there waiting for their promised Messi∣•••••• One, and a chiefe of this superstitious Expedition, was Amanes L••••••••••••, a Phy∣sitian of great note, accounted one of the most learned of his profession, and a writer therein; and Iohn Micas, a Merchant of great wealth. They passed through France, Germanie, Hungarie, their company (like a snow-ball) encreasing as they went, with the addition of other Iewes of like credulitie. When they came to Constantinople, there were of them in many bands or companies thirtie thousand, •••••••••• ••••••••••••, the

Turkish Commaunder, thought to gaine by this occasion; and would not suffer them to passe ouer the water into Asia, without many hundred thousands of duckats, except they would passe on horsebacke. This example was soone both spread and followed of the other Bassaes and Commaunders in Asia, as they went; their wealth and sub∣stance being euery where so fleeced, that they came into Syria, much lessened in num∣bers, in estate miserable and beggerly; new Officers euery where, as new hungry Flies, lighting on these wretched carkasses (so I may call them:) some they whipped, some they empaled, some they hanged, and burned others. Thus were these miserable Pil∣grims wasted: and Don Iohn Baltasar was present, when Amat•• aforesaid being dead with this affliction, his Physicke-bookes were at an Out-cry to be sold at Damasco, and because they were in Latiue, no man would buy them, till at last another Iew became Chapman. Micas, one of the wealthiest men which Europe held, died poore in an Hospitall at Constantinople. And this was the issue of their Pilgri∣mage to the Sabbaticall Streame, which they supposed to finde in this Persian Gulfe; where wee haue too long holden you the spectator•• of this Iewish Tra∣gedie.

The Redde Sea, or Arabia, Gulfe, seemed vnwilling to be the Oceans subiect: so many small Islands doth she continually muster in resistance, besides her vndermining the Sea with her shallow Channell, conspiring the destruction of many heedlesse Ma∣riners, that here will aduenture as tenants to the Sea in their mouing houses. Once (by a mightier hand) was it helped to preuaile against the Seas force, to discouer •••••• drie Land in the middest thereof, and with her waterie erected walls to guard these new passengers, till the same hand reuersed it, orrather rewarded the then emptie bellie thereof with the prey of so many thousand Aegyptians. Babelmandel, Cama∣ran, and Mazva are accounted amongst the chiefe of these Isolets: ••••chen hath most Soueraignetie; being the Seat of the Turkish Bassa for Abassia.

Socotera is without the Strait. The naturals are Christians, of S. Thomas S•••••• who is here said to haue suffered shipwracke, and of whose broken shippe was erected a Church. They are great warriours, both men and women, and great Magicians. They haue no vse of Trafficke, Letters, or Nauigation, and yet are esteemed the no∣blest people in the world.

(Two r 1.261 other Islands confront this; of which one (they say) is the habitation of men, and the other of women, which sometimes haue entercourse one with the other, but the Ayre (Natures inexorable and heauie handmaid) not suffering any long abode to each, but in their owne allotted portion.

Loth am I to looke any further into that boisterous Sea, and therefore leauing all that huge Tract of Africke, as compassed by a suddaine thought, but vnsalu∣ted, wee shall finde other Asian Islands in the Mediterranean. And because, be∣ing now wearied, the Archipelago would be too tedious a passage for vs, neither are there many Islands worth naming in Propo••tis, or the E••xin••, we will speake a little of Rhodes and Cyprus, and then remember how long wee haue forgotten ourselues.

The former of those containeth about an hundred and twentie myles: fertile in soyle, and of most pleasant ayre, caused by that loue which Phoebus beareth to it; there neuer passing day, in which he doth not, in his bright and shining apparrell, salute it. And for this cause happily was that huge Colossus of Brasse (gilded ouer, and reputed the most wonderfull of the Worlds seuen Wonders) here dedicated to the Sunne (though some ascribe it to Iupiter.) the workmanship of Chares Lin∣di••••, of threescore and tenne cubits, ••••or as others tell, a hundred fortie three feet, s 1.262 but it selfe told fourescore cubits in height, which, falling by an Earthquake, the Oracle forbad the Rhodians to erect againe. But nothing forbad Mabias, or Mu∣•••••• the fifth Caliph, after his seuen yeares Warre about Constantinople (as sayth t 1.263 Constantinus out of Theophanes) inuading this Island, to carrie away nine hundred (or, as Constant••nus numbreth, three thousand and fourescore) Camels burthens of this Brazen carkasse.

The Temple of Liber was here enriched with many presents of the Greekes and Romanes, to both which the Citie of Rhodes was had in friendly and honourable regard. Much was their force by Sea in auncient times, and for two hundred yeares space it was the Seat of the Hospitular-Knights, which now reside in Malta; driuen thence by mightie Solyman.

These Knights had also, by purchase of King Richard the first of England, the Island of Cyprus, u 1.264 dedicated by the Poets to Venus, to whome the inhabitants were too much addicted, as appeared by their Temples and other vanities in her ho∣nour. At Paphos shee was worshipped in the likenesse of a Nauell; and round thereabouts (by the Deuils working) it rained not. Trogus writeth, That the Cy∣prians prostituted their daughters (before they married them) to Mariners on the shore. Wee haue seene at Rome (sayth R. Vol••teranus) the attendants of Queene Carlotta, neuer a whit better then those auncient.

Of Cyprus thus reporteth Ammianus Marcellinus, lib. 4. It is ennobled by two Cities, Salamis, and Paphus; the one famous for Iupiters Images; the other, for the Temple of Venus. It is so plentifull in all thinges, that it needes no helpe of other Nations, and of her owne abundance is able to set forth a Shippe, from the Keele to the Toppe-sayle, with all prouision, furnished to the Sea. Neither grieue I to tell it; the Romanes more greedily then iustly made themselues Lords thereof. For Ptolomey the King being confederate with vs, was proscribed without any fault, but the defect of our Treasurie, who therefore poysoned himselfe, and the Isle became Tributarie. Sextus Rufus fayth as much. Amasis was the first, if wee beleeue H••rodotus, x 1.265 , that euer conquered Cyprus, and máde it. Tributarie. Hee also sayth (Lib. 7.) That the Cyprians were partly from Salamine and A∣thens, partly from Arcadia, partly from Cythnus, from Phoenicia, and from Ae∣thyopia. Pli••ie affirmeth y 1.266 , That it was sometime the Seat of nine Kings, and was diuersly named, as Acamantis, Cerastis, Afpelia, Amathusia, Macaria, Cryptus, and Colinia. It was such a Forrest of Trees z 1.267 , that when as their Ship∣ping and Mines were not able to waste them, it was made lawfull for any man to fell and destroy them, and for his labour to possesse the Land which hee had so cleared.

In the time of Constantine it was forsaken of the inhabitants, as before forsa∣ken of the Elements, which refused to water with any droppes of raine that Island (sometime accounted happie) the space of seuenteene yeares together, or as others haue it, sixe and thirtie, re-peopled from diuerse parts by Helena, the mother of Constantine * 1.268 , and remaining to the Greeke Empire, till that Lion of England made it a prey, and the Knights purchase, who sold it to Guido Lusignan: whose po∣steritie fayling, the Venetians succeeded, till Selym the second, minding to erect a Religious Hospitall, to testifie their Magnificence, began with an irreligious foun∣dation. * 1.269 For whereas their holy Lawes will not suffer any thing to be dedicated to holy vses, which their owne Sword hath not conquered, he brake League with the Venetian, and robbed them of this Island, which they are thought, not with the iustest title, before to haue possessed. But it is high time to bethinke vs of our Indian shore, whence wee haue taken so large a prospect; where wee are stayed to be tran∣sported into the chiefe of those Islands, there to take a more leisurely view of their Regions and Religions.

CHAP. XIIII.

Of the Islands of Iapon, and their Religions.

THe Iesuites haue not more fixed the eyes of the World vpon them in the Westerne parts, then they haue fixed their owne eyes on the Easterne; here seeking to repayre, with their vtempered Mor∣tar, the ruines of their Falling Babylon: there laying a new founda∣tion of their after-hopes: here, by their Politicke Mysteries and Mysticall Policies, endeauouring to recouer; there, by new Con∣quests to make supply to their losses: here, for busie intruding into affaires of State, suspected by their owne, hated by their aduersaries; there, by seeming to neglect Greatnesse, and to contemne Riches, of the mightiest are not feared, while others beleeue, obserue, and admire them.

Both here and there they spare not to a 1.270 compasse Sea and Land, to winne Pro∣selytes; euery of their Residences, or Colledges, being as so many Forts to esta∣blish this new Romane Monarchie, but with vnlike aduantage, encountering there with Reason (or rather with the carkasse of Reason) attended with Igno∣rance and Superstition, whose Owlish eyes cannot endure the enterview of Truth, though darkened with those Cloudes, wherewith they ouer-cast it: Here with Truth, yea, the Soule of Truth, true Religion; whose Shield of Faith; and Sword of the Spirit, these (the stronger part of those strongest Gates of Hell) cannot preuaile against. A Spanish Faction of Spanish humour and successe, more easily conque∣ring a world of the naked Americanes, and esseminate Indians, then keeping all they had in Europe. Such are the armes of the one, and the preaching of the other.

Yet would I faine be thankefull to the one and the other b 1.271 , the first for furthering Geographie with knowledge of a new world; the other, for making a possibilitie of a better world to some, whereas otherwise there was a generall desperation of all.

Neither are the wounds of Popish superstition so absolutely mortall, as the Ethnike Atheisme; the one hauing no foundation at all; the other shewing the true founda∣tion: although their Babylonish slime euen heere supplieth the roome of better mat∣ter, besides their stubble, hay and wood built vpon it. Better a mixed Truth, then a to∣tall errour: and a maymed CHRIST, then none at all. But howsoéuer they bee beholden to them for their Diuinity, it were inhumanity in vs, not to acknowledge a beholdingnesse to them, for that they giue vs in the knowledge of many peoples, although in all their Discourses this caution is necessary, not to yeelde them a Ca∣tholique and vniuersall credite, where we any way may spie them dawbing the walls of their pretended Catholike Church. In relating their Miracles, and such like, wee will remember they are Iesuites: in other things not seruiceable to Rome, wee will heare them as Trauellers, when lying doth not aduantage them, nor hurt vs. But as the Labours of the Iesuites may euerie where breed shame to our negligence in a better quarrell: so in Iapon it is most of all admirable, that the furthest part of the World should be so neere to their industry. And that you may at last bee acquainted with Iapon, wee will borrow of them to pay your hopes, by their long introduction suspended.

Maffaus (who hath translated and set forth more then thirtie of those Ia∣ponian Epistles) in the twelfth Booke of his Indian Historie, doth thus de∣scribe it. Besides other lesse, three principall Islands beare the name of Iapon;

which the c 1.272 fi••st and greate••t most peculiarly challengeth, containeth in it three & fift•••• Kingdomes or Principalities, the chiefe Citie whereof is Meaco: The second is X••m••m, diuided into nine Seg••iories: The third, Xicoc, quartered into foure Lordships, so that there are in all of this Iaponian Dominion, threescore and six Shires, of petty King∣domes. The space of land is measured two hundred leagues in length, in bredth some∣where ten, in other places thirtie, betweene the thirty and thirty eight degrees of Nor∣therly Latitude: Eastward from China. The soile is not very fertile, subiect to much snow, the air•• holsome. The bowels of the earth are stored with diuers mettals; the trees are fruitfull, and one d 1.273 wonderfull, in that it abhorreth moisture, and if haply it be moist∣ned, it sh••aketh & becommeth withered: which they remedy by plucking it vp by the rootes, and after it is dried in the Sun, to set it in drie sand; if a bough be broken off and nailed on againe, it groweth. They haue two high mountaines, one of which casteth forth flames, and in the top thereof the diuellvseth to shew himselfe in a bright cloud ••••o some, that (by long fasting) haue prepared themselues to this sight: the other, called Fi∣geniana, is by some leagues higher then the clouds. They much esteeme a tall persona∣blenesse: they plucke off the haires on their head: children before; the common people halfe way; the Nobilitie almost all) leauing but a little growing behinde: to touch which were to offer great indignitie to a man. They can indure much hardship: an infant new borne in the coldest of winter is presently carried to the Riuer to be washed: their education is hard: yet are they neat: they vse forkes (as the Chinois) or stickes, not touching the meate with their fingers, and therefore neede no naperie: they sit on car∣pets, and enter the roomes vnshod, their tables are a hand high, some eighteene in∣ches square, curiously wrought, to each guest one, and changed at euery new seruice or change of meate, Quabacondonus, against a solemne and festiuall entertainment of his Father, prepared a hundred and thirtie thousand of these tablets. Their houses are most of wood, because of often Earthquakes: and some of Stone. Temples and Mona∣steries they haue for both Sexes: and more had, till Nubunanga destroyed them. Their language is one, & yet exceedingly diuersified according as they differ in State or Sexe: or as they speake in praise or dispraise, vsing a diuers Idiom. They vse Characters in writing and printing, as in China. Their swords are of a most excellent temper. Their customes differ in many things from other men. e 1.274 Blacke is a festiuall colour, white a Funerall: their meates, drinkes, perfumes, are as dissonant to ours. Their teeth are coloured with blacke, as beauties liuery borrowed of Art, which wee by Art would auoide. They mount on the right side of the Horse. They sit, (as wee rise) to en∣tertaine a friend. They giue to the sicke persons, salt things, sharpe, and rawe: ne∣uer let bloud: wee contrary (as in other rites) either to other ridiculous. All their Nobles are called Toni: amongst whom are diuers degrees: all of them holding their all in capite, to finde so many Souldiours to the Warres, at their owne costs. Gene∣nerally the whole Nation is witty: pouertie is a disgrace to no man. Reproches, Thefts, periuri••s, Dice-play are hatefull: very ambitious they are in all things, re∣spectiue to their credit, full of courtesie each to other, neuer bralling, no not at home with their houshoulds. The Inconstancie of that State learneth them by vse to prepare for, and to welcome, euery State. They are exceedingly subtle, hypo∣pocriticall and double-dealing: they are also of cruell disposition, not to their ene∣mies alone, but sometimes will assay the goodnesse of their blade and strength of their arme, on some innocent bodie; and in case of distresse, they esteeme it a credit to preuent the sentence of lawe by bloudy execution done on themselues, vvhich they vsually doe in ripping vp their breastes a crosse, a seruant or friend attending to smite off his head: and if it bee a man of any sort, his friends and followers in like manner with their owne hands plucke out their bowels to testifie their loue. The Gouernours haue absolute rule ouer their inferiours: yea, in euery priuate Family the authoritie extendeth to life or death. All ••apon sometime obeyed one Prince called Vo, or Dairi, who at length addicting himselfe to his priuate delights, and putting off the burthen of ruling to his officers, grew in contempt: and at last euery

one ••e••••ed on his owne prouince, whereof you haue heard there are threescore and six, Leauing the Dairi a bare title, and a Heralds Kingdome to giue termes of honour at his pleasure, whence he raiseth great reuenue, otherwise subiect (excepting his Title) as are all the rest, to the Lord of Tensa (so they call the noblest Kingdome adioining to Meaco) This f 1.275 Vo or Dairi descendeth by succession from the auncient Kings, out of which he is chosen, and is honoured as a God. He may not touch the ground with his foote, which if hee do••, hee is put by the place: neuer goeth out of his house, seldome is seene of the people. He fitteth in his seate with a bowe and arrowes on one hand of him, on the other a Dagger. If he should kill any, or if hee shew him∣selfe an enemy to peace, he is depriued as well as if he had troden on the ground. All great men haue their factors with him to procure new titles of honour, the onely fe∣well of his greatnes.

They haue another generall officer or chiefe Iustice, which denounceth Warre, and in peace, giueth sentence on matters in controuersie. But these are but the instruments of the Lords of Tensa, as are also the Bonzij. These are their Religious, among whom one is supreme in cases spirituall, by whom all their old holies are ordered, and all new are confirmed or dashed. The Tundi, (which are as their Bishops) are by him consecra∣ted and confirmed, although their nomination be by lay patrons. He dispenseth with them in diuers priuiledges and immunities: he inioyeth great reuenue and soueraintie, and is aduanced hereto by money and kindred. The Tundi giue Priestly orders, and dis∣pense in smaller matters, as eating flesh on daies prohibited.

They haue many Sects, some reckon them twelue; all truely agreeing, in disagreeing with Truth: some of them Epicure-like denying Gods prouidence, & the soules immor∣talitie. They hold that a man hath three soules, which one after another come into, and depart out of the body. Few of their Bonzij will openly teach this Doctrine, but la∣bour to hold the people in awe. Amida & Xaca they preach, as Sauiours, & to be wor∣shipped. Some of their Sects doe beleeue an eternall life, and promise it to all such as call vpon these supposed Deities, as Saints which sometime ledd so austere a life, for the sinnes of mankinde, that for a man to vexe his minde, or macerate his body for his owne sinnes, would not onely be superstitious, but offensiue and derogatorie to their merits. And here the kinde-hearted Iesuite g 1.276 , is panged with a fit of Charitie to yoke the Lutherans with them; as if the sufferings of IESVS were but the superstitions of Amida, as if either the sufferings of man, imperfect, borrowed, dutie, could be, or the sufferings of God could not be meritorious; or as if the I utherans denied Christi∣an contrition (whose affect is Indignation, h 1.277 effect (selfe-reuenge) as they doe Popish confession and satisfaction. These Gods they call Fotoques. Other Gods of a lesse mould they call Camis, which haue their charges and peculiar offices, for health, chil∣dren, riches, &c. as among the elder (that I trouble not the queasie stomackes of the later) Romanes.

These were Kings and Noble-men, or Inuenters of Artes, of whom they haue as true tales as Homer or the Legend yeeldeth. Taicosama that died i 1.278 a few yeares since, (the first which in these many later ages tooke the Title of a King, which, together with the crowne, he receiued of the King of China) ordained before his death, that his body should not be burned after the wonted manner, but closed in a Chest, and, in a sumptuous temple for that purpose built k 1.279 his image should be enshrined and wor∣shipped with the Title of Scinfaciman, or New Faciman, the name of their Mars or warlike God: which was also done. Thus he, which in his youth had vsed to cut wood and carry it into the Market to sell for his daily fustenance, for his valure promoted in militarie honours, at last became the greatest Monarch that Iapon had seene in eight hundred yeares, and not contented with humane greatnes, would aspire to that diuine, whereof hee himselfe had beene a derider in others. His name before was Faxiba, cal∣led after, Quabacondonus, the highest Title next to the Dairi, and signifieth the chiefe of the treasure: next borrowing a kingly Stile from China, would (mad folly) on his death∣bed bequeath Godhead to a man, and immortalitie to a carkasse: when hee could no longer hold out his pride, cruelty, and other wicked courses, which made his presence

dreadfull, his memory detestable. Nabumanga was his predecessour in his state and impietie, arrogating diuine honour to himselfe l 1.280 but destroying the Temples of their Gods, together with their Temple-keepers, the Bonzij. This appeared at Frenoiama, a famous Vniuersitie of those Bonzij, nine miles from M••aco, wherein eight hundred yeares past, a Iaponian King had erected three thousand and eight hundred Temples, with houses adioined for the Bonzij: allowing to their maintenance the third part of the reuenue of the Kingdome of Vomen. Hence proceeded their orders and gouerne∣ment in affaires both of state and Religion, being a Seminarie of Lawes and Superstiti∣ons. But these temples in time diminished to eight hundred, and the Bonzian disci∣pline as much ••mpatred, and altered from austeritie (in some) to wantonnes, (in others) from Artes, to Armes. The Bonzii tooke part with Nechien, enemy of Nabunanga, who enraged hereat made truce with the one, to destroy the other. The Bonzij not pre∣uailing by their suing for peace, fortified themselues for Warre in the Temple of Qua∣non their God of health and long life, much frequented with Pilgrims from all parts; much solemnized with their pompous processions (like in all parts if ye beleeue the Iesuite to their Corpus-Christi-solemnitie) which grew the more famous for that these were but the preamble to the like pompe in the Gibon-Feastiuall at Meaco. But all preuailed not with Nabunanga, who destroyed both Temple and Priestes with fire and sword, burning foure hundred other temples for company, in the yeare 1572. At Meaco hee burned twenty of these Bonzian Cloisters of the greater sort, besides fourescore lesse, and in one of them threescore Bonzian women or Nuns, whose Deuotion was employed in begging for the reparation of the Temple of Dai∣bud. Amongst the rest, as the Grecians had their Mercury with his Caduceus, so the Iaponians haue their I••za with his Trident, to conuay soules departed into their allot∣ted eternall residences: The Bonzij his Chapleines by lots enquired whither they should remoue him, he commanded it, and they with great solemnitie performed it, but out of a place, which then escaped, to another m 1.281 wherein, and where with he was burnt. Fa∣cusangin was another Bonzian Academy adorned with many Colledges which he de∣stroyed. Xinguen the King of Cainochun shaued his head and beard: and professed him∣selfe a Bonzi, & not only attired himselfe in their habite, but thrice a day did performe their superstitions, hauing six hundred Bonzij to his followers. He writ to Nabunan∣ga, intitling himselfe the Patrone of those Religions: the other in his answere stiled himselfe the Tamer of Diuels, and enemie of Sects. But after that he would bee a God, soone did he cease to bee a man; the immortall God, hating corriuals, by his owne subiects destroyed his life, riches, and memory. These Bonzij are for the most part gen∣tlemen whom their Parents (hauing many children) for want of maintenance thrust into Cloisters; Shauen (as you haue heard) and Shauers couetously pilling and polling the people of their money by many deuises, as by selling them scrolles to keepe them (by the Diuell) from hurt of Diuels after death: borrowing of money heere, n 1.282 to re∣pay with great interest in the Future world; giuing the Creditor a bill or scroll of their hands for securitie: by telling of things stollen or lost, (which they doe by In∣chantments calling a Diuell into a Child, who being so possessed, answereth their que∣stions) by selling their blessings, and curses like Balaam. Some by vow (the most) liue vnmarried: as the Bonzian women.

Another Sect, called Ianambuxos, before their admission into that order liue two thousand or more together on a high mountaine, for the space of threescore daies ma∣cerating themselues with selfe-inflicted penance; the Diuell in diuers shapes meane∣while appearing to them, and after this they are receiued into that damnable fellow∣ship, distinguished by white stockes hanging downe their neckes, curled haire, and blacke hats, and so wander from place to place, giuing notice of their comming by a little Bell. Another Sect called Genguis dwell on some high Hill, blacke of complexion, and (as is supposed) horned, marry wiues of their owne kindred, passe ouer great riuers by the diuels help; who on a certain hill at times appointed appeareth to them; of whom by the name of Amida hee is worshipped. In another hill hee was wont to appeare to his deuoutest followers, whom then he would leade as they thought

to Paradise, indeede to destruction, they say that a sonne, not able to perswade his fa∣ther from this passage to Paradise, secretly followed him with his bow and arrowes, and when the Diuell appeared shot and wounded a Foxe, whom hee followed by the bloud to a lake wherein hee found many dead mens bones. They haue another V∣niuersitie in Iapon called Coia, whose Bonzian students are of the Sect of Combendaxis, supposed the Inuenter of the Iaponian Letters. He in his old age digged a foure-square Caue, into which he conuayed himselfe, affirming that he then died not, but after some millions of yeares would returne in the daies of one Mirozu, which then should bee a most worthy King in Iapon. About his sepulchre burne many Lampes sent thither from diuers Nations, with opinion that such as enrich that monument shall themselues here bee enriched, and in the other life by Combendaxis patronised. In the Colledges here liue six thousand of those Shauelings: from whom women are restrained vpon paine of death. At Fat••nocha••ti, the Bonzij o 1.283 trained vp witty and proper youthes in all trickes of subtiltie and guile, acquainting them with Genealogies of Princes that so they might counterfet to be the sonnes of such or such great men, and borrowing money on that credit might enrich their wicked Colledge: till the sleight being found, they were killed of the inhabitants.

There be that worship the Sunne and Moone, who haue an Image with three heads, which (they say) is the vertue of the Sunne, Moone and Elements. p 1.284 These worship the Diuell, in visible shape appearing to them, with many and costly Sacrifices.

Some hold Xacas booke in such Veneration, that without it they hold it impossible to be saued. Other Bonzij haue beene in other ages in high reputation of holines, but q 1.285 one especially, not a hundred yeers since, the Author of the Sect called Icoxos: the ruler or Generall of which Sect is openly wicked, but so adored of the people, that if he but looke on them they will salute him with teares of ioy, praying him that all their sinnes may bee pardoned, and therewith giue him no small quantitie of their Gold. His yearely festiuall is so honoured with thronging of the people, that in the entry of the Cloyster many are troden vnder foote, which yet is of the blinde people accounted a happinesse, many willingly yeelding themselues to be killed in that presse. And in the night, whiles his praises are sung, there is a great howling and lamentation. Nequiron was Author of the Sect F••quexan. But of other their superstitions you shall heare more in the next Chapter.

CHAP. XV.

A Continuation of the former Discourse touching the Religions of Iapon.

MEaco their chiefe Citie is chiefe also in superstitions, hauing had (if re∣port lye not) on the hill neere to it seuen thousand Cloisters or Abbies: one of which is so famous, that the Kings in their Warres will vow great summes of Gold, and after victory pay the same there: the peo∣ple also in distresse make it their sanctuarie, where the Diuell by visi∣ons deludeth them. In August they celebrate the Feast of Gibon with Pageants: fifteene or sixteene Chariots, couered with silke goe before, in them are chil∣dren with Minstralsie. Euery Chariot is drawne with thirtie or fortie men, and followed by their peculiar companies or trades: and after them Chariots of men armed, which all passe by the Temple in the morning. In the Euening, two litters come forth, carri∣ed by men; the one of the God, the other of his Lemman: then followeth the third: of his Wife, with which the men runne vp and downe in such a confused manner, as may signifie her iealousie. Here the people weepe and pray to their Goddesse, whom yet with a contrarie deuotion they comfort: and lastly (as if by the peoples me∣diation) the Litters are ioined together, and carried into the Temple. In the same moneth they haue their Feast of All soules, in which they light many

Lampes, at their doores, and all night walke vp and downe the Citie: and ma∣ny suppose at a certaine place they meete with the walking Ghosts of their decta∣••ed friends, and after welcoming ceremonies, they set vittailes a 1.286 before them, at least in that place, where hauing a while attended they inuite them to their houses. The reason of this refreshing they alleadge the long iourney to Paradise, which in lesse then three yeares space cannot bee passed, and therefore they haue neede of heartning. Two dales this Feast lasteth, in which they clense their graues and giue presents to the Bonzii, In March they haue festiuall playes, in which ma∣ny meere in the afternoone painted with the Images of their Gods on their shoulders: and parting themselues into two rankes, the boyes begin with stones, the men conti∣nue the fray with arrowes, poles, and swords, alwaies with the death of some, and im∣punitie of the doers.

At Sacai in Iuly they keepe the Feast of Daimaogin, to whom many Temples are de∣dicated: in which the Idoll is carried with much pompe on horsebacke, followed first by the Bonzij, then the Nobilitie, after them certaine Witches, whom armed troupes of souldiours follow. Then commeth the Litter of the God, all gilded, carried by twenty men, answering each other in certaine hymnes; the people worshipping.

Some of their Bonzii professe a militarie discipline, as the Knights of Malta. The profession called Neugori was instituted by Cacuban (who is therefore deified) in which some intend their prayers, whiles other fight, and others performe their taske of making fiue arrowes a day. Their gouernment is an Anarchy; euery one obeying and commanding, the meanest person amongst them hauing a Negatiue in all their consultations: And nothing is agreed on till all be agreed. In the night they often kill one another without remorse, and yet (such is their religion) this Sect holdeth it a sinne to kill a flye or any liuing thing.

They beleeue diuers Paradises, into each of which their peculiar Gods carrie their owne worshippers: And some make ouer-hastie iourneyes thither on this sort. He watcheth certaine daies, and then out of a Pulpit preacheth of the contempt of the world. Others betake them to bee his companions, while some giue their almes. On the last day hee maketh an Oration to his fellowes, who all drinking Wine goe into their Ship, carrying a sithe to cut vp all the brambles in their way; and putting on their clothes, stufte their sleeues with stones, and hanging a great stone about their neckes to helpe them the sooner to their Paradise, hurle themselues into the Sea. And great honour is done to them being thus dead. I saw one (saith Vilela) that had seuen of these companions, which with their great alacritie, and my great amazement, did this. But they which worship Amida, obserue another rite. Being weary of liuing, they put themselues in a strait hole of the earth receiuing breath on∣ly by a Reede, and so continue fasting and praying till death. Some of them in honour of a certaine Idoll doe cast themselues downe from a high Tower, where this Idoll is placed, and after their death are reputed Saints.

Others b 1.287 saile to their Paradise (as before) but, when they haue launched into the deep, make holes in the ships keele for death to enter, and the sea to swallow both it and them Iosephus Acosta c 1.288 tells of a strange Confession which is obserued in this order. There are (saith he) in Ocaca very high and steepe Rockes, which haue pikes or points on them aboue two hundred fadome high. One of which, higher and more terrible then the rest, daunteth and terrifieth the Xa••abusis (which be Pilgrims) to looke vp vnto it: vpon the top of the point there is a great rodde of Iron of three fadome long, placed there by a strange deuise: at the end of this rod is a ballance tied, whereof the scales are so bigge, as a man may sit in one of them. And the Goquis (which bee Diuels in hu∣mane shape) command those pilgrims to enter therein, one after another, not lea∣uing one of them. d 1.289 Then with an Engine or Instrument, which moueth by meanes of a wheele, they make this rod of Iron to hang in the aire; one of the Xamabusis bee∣ing set in one of the scales, which (because there is no counterpoise in the other scale) presently hangeth downe, and the empty one riseth to touch the rod aforesaid, whereupon the ballance hangeth. Then the Goquis telleth the poore Pilgrim that hee

must confesse all the sins that he can remember with a lowde voice, that all may heare: Which he presently doth, some of the hearers laughing, some sighing. At euery sinne mentioned, the other scale falles a little, till that hauing told all, it remaines equall with the other, wherein the sorrowfull penitent sits. Then the Goquis turnes the wheele, and drawes the rod and ballance vnto him, and the Pilgrim comes forth, and another enters till all haue passed. If any concealed any sinne, the empty scale yeelded not, and if when hee was vrged to confesse, he grew obstinate, the Goquis cast him down from the top, where in an instant he is broken into a thousand peeces. A Iaponian who had seuen times made triall hereof, being conuerted to Christianitie reported this. But the terror was such (said he) that few would conceale any thing. The place hereof is cal∣led Sangenotocoro, that is, the place of confession. Thus, much Acosta, whom as I thanke for the Story, so I would a little trouble (for hee would more partiently heare and beare, then some of his hotter brethren) with a question concerning confession. And if the question come too late, yet the Societie liueth (and will longer then a better thing:) into a Colledge of whom Iapon hath brought vs, as their names here testifie. The question is, whether euery residence of the Iesuites be not a Sangenotocoro of Ocaca, that is a place of confession (so doth Sangenotocoro signifie) of which we may exclaime 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and if you will 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the one for the cruell terrour where with it filleth the Conscience, and the later for the fleshly filthines wherein Ocaca is not bla∣med, but their e 1.290 Churches haue beene Stewes, and Confession, the Baude. But to let this passe, and consider the former. What Racke or Rocke can Ocaca yeeld like to this, which the f 1.291 Councell of Trent hath framed, that full Confession of all mortall sins (loe here the Racke) euen the very thoughts against the two last commandements, with the circumstances of the sinnes, is necessarie by diuine ordinance vnto all which haue sinned after Baptisme; &(loe here the Rocke) Anathema to the gaine-sayers. Tush, your coine is not currant, although you yeeld it profitable, & comfortable, and satisfactorie to the offended Church, except you yeeld all necessary, all diuine. Diuines shal I call you, or Goquis, Diuels in the flesh, that make a hell in the spirits of men? that with your debi∣ta praemeditatione, & with your omnia & singula peccata, etiam occulta, tiam circum∣stantias, g 1.292 circumuent poore Christians, and put them in an Ocacan ballance ouer hell∣mouth, there to fall, without such fauour as to be broken in peeces; Goe Cardinall, and write h 1.293 whole volumes for the proofe hereof, yet would I rather chuse to en∣ter the Sangenotocoro-scale; then your Confession-schoole. Easie it may be indeede to seared Iesuiticall Consciences that account Treason Religion, yea pleasant and delightfull to such Statists to haue Kings vpon the knees of their bodies, to poure out before them the secrets of their soules, and (they are wiser then Salomon i 1.294 which estee∣med it vnpossible) to search out the Kings heart. But to such as haue busines enough to know and rule themselues, and doe indeede make Conscience of euery dutie, what intollerable anguish is here prepared? when my heart, besides that it is wicked and de∣ceitfull aboue all, who can search it? is like an vntamed heifer, who can rule it? Had I not neede alway to haue a Priest at mine elbow, to whom to shriue mee? k 1.295 Who kno∣weth the errours of his life? and who knoweth when he hath made his due premedi∣tation to examine them? This made Bellarmine vse the difficultie of Confession l 1.296 as an argument of the diuine Institution thereof. It is so difficult (saith he) that no power of man or the Church could haue imposed it, and therefore it was diuine. I vvill not say, who instituted the ballance of Ocaca, and yet it was a hard thing, and neuer the like heard of; I say, that the Gospell imposeth not such hard things (this were to bring vs backe to the Lawe) but prescribeth an m 1.297 easie yoke and a light burthen: easie to such as loue not their ease, light to such as like and delight in it. But this, euen to those that dote vpon it, and deuote themselues to it, is not onely hard, but altogether impossible: Witnesse Bellarmine himselfe, Quid enim mosestius, quid onerosius, quàm vt cogantur eti∣am viri principes, Reges{que} potentissimi, sacerdotibus qui & ipsi homines sunt, peccata sua omnia detegere, quamuis arcana, quamuis turpia, &c. Witnesse experience in such n 1.298 as haue tried it more neerely then Bellarmines Controuersies would giue him leisure, yet liuing in continuall disquietnes, and torment of their Consciences, in the vse of their

sacrament of Confession,

receiuing no rest day nor night, as seruing Gods, who can not giue it them.

These are the words of Sheldon (happily brought out of that dark∣nesse, wherein, and whereof he was a Priest and Minister, to a clearer light) who out of his owne knowledge addeth;

That it is not imaginable what inconsolable liues, some, that are frequent in the vse of Confession (as necessary to saluation) do leade: there is no stonie heart which would not pitty them, knowing their torments.

But lest any man thinke, that some Goquis hath hurled me out of the seate of my hi∣storie, to fall and split my selfe vpon these Iesuiticall rockes, I will returne to our nar∣ration of the Iaponites. Diuers of them before their Images in desperate distresse dis∣embowell themselues in that bloudy manner before mentioned.

To tell o 1.299 of their Idoll Casunga, of whom they begge riches, Tamondea, Besomon∣des, Homocondis and Zoiolis: to which foure, their superstitious opinion committeth so many heauens in custody, Canon and Xixi the sonnes of Xaca, Maristenes, Tirigis, and others, would be too tedious to report. Organtinus p 1.300 telleth that whiles on a time the feast of this last was solemnizing, a showre of stones rained with such violence, that the company to the number of twenty thousand, betooke them to their heeles. But Amida is most worne in their lippes; beggers asking and blessing in his name; chapmen in buying and selling sounding and singing it: the Bonzij promising salua∣tion to all that inuoke it. Admirable are the Temples q 1.301 for matter and workmanship erected to him; one neare Meaco is a hundred and forty elles in length, with a huge Image of Amida, hauing thirtie Images about it of souldiers, besides Ethiopians and Deuills, yea windes and thunders figured, and a thousand Images of Canon (on each side of the Temple fiue hundred) all in like, but monstrous shape, with thirty armes, two onely holding proportion to his body, the breast adorned with seuen faces; all the Images and other furniture so glittering with golde, that it dazeleth the beholders eyes. One Temple is dedicated iust by to a Lizard, (which they make Author and Patron of learning) without Altar or Image in it. Hee that readeth of the huge works of Taicosama, holding sometime a hundred thousand workemen in labour at once, may present to his imagination the incredible buildings which those tyrants, by so many slauish hands, can raise.

They are very curious and ambitious in setting forth their funeralls; a matter of no small consequence to the couetous Bonzij, who follow the corpse, if the party were rich, sometime two hundred in a company singing the praises of that GOD which the deceased had most worshipped, beating a basen instead of a Bell, till they come to the fire, where so many rites are performed. I should doe you wrong r 1.302 to relate them, hauing beene redious in the rest. Onely after so much wickednesse of men, let vs adde somewhat of the admirable workes of GOD in Iapon.

On the two and twenty day of Iuly in the yeare 1596. it rained ashes round about Meaco, couering the ground as if it had beene snow. Soone after it rained both there and in other places, as it had beene womens haire. And not long after followed an Earthquake that hurled downe Temples and Pallaces, which with their ruines destroi∣ed thousands: six hundred gilded images in the temple of Ianzusangue were cast down, and broken in peeces, as many remaining whole. It brought vp the Sea a great way vpon the maine land, which is carried backe with it into the Sea, not leauing menti∣on that there had beene land. So was the Citie Ochinofama swallowed, Famaoqui, Ecuro, Fingo, Cascicanaro, the neighbour-townes, attended her in this new voyage, and became Sea. The shippes in the hauen found no more securitie, but were also de∣uoured. The like happened in the yeare of our LORD 1586. to Nagafama, a place frequented with merchants, which the Sea before had enriched, then with an Earth∣quake deuoured, the earth in many places opening such wide mouthes, that a ealli∣uer-shot could scarce reach from the one side to the other, bleching out of that yaw∣ning passage such a ••••in••e, as none were able to pa••e ••y. •••••• one∣ly shook with seare, but bellowed out such roaring cries vnder that blow of their Cre∣ators hands, as did make the accident more dreadfull. Yet was all •••••• forgotten,

and Taicosama fell to building of new Pallaces.

He that listeth further to be acquainted with Iaponian affaires, may resort to the E∣pistles of the Iesuites, which, besides these I haue named, are many: and of that socie∣tie are not many lesle then two hundred in this Iland f 1.303 , which also is now become an Episcopall Sea. The first of them was Xauier, one of Ignatius first companions, and like to haue beene canonized before him too. But the first finding of this Iland is by Galvanus ascribed to Anthony Mota and his fellowes 1542. But before these M. Polo writeth of this Iland, which hee calleth Zepangu t 1.304 whither Cubla•• the great Tartarian Can in the yeare 1264. sent two Captaines to conquer the Iland. The winds (as angry with the Tartarians, and taking part with the Ilanders) raised so stormie a Sea, that (when there were now thirtie thousand of their company landed in a little Iland) they were forced to put off to Sea, and scattered with tempests. The Ilanders set forth a nauy to take those Tartarians, which so confusedly ordered that enterprise, that the Tartarians found meanes to make themselues maisters of their enemies nauie, and therewith to saile away. Marcus Paulus reporteth like things of their idola∣trous Religion, as you haue heard: of Idoles with heads of Oxen, Hogs, and Dogs, and other deformed shapes: and some with many hands, as a testimony of their great power. The enemies which they tooke in warre, not able to redeeme themselues, he saith they did eate in solemne Feasts: He addeth, that in the Iaponian language Man∣gi was called Cin: as now it is Cina or China.

I haue presumed to adde a peece of a Letter of Quabacondonus to the Viceroy of In∣dia, which after other things hath these words. Iapon is the kingdome of Chamis, whom we esteeme to be the same with Scin, which is the beginning of all things. This Scin is the substance and very being of all things: and all things are one and the same with Scin, and into Scin are resolued, which in Scina is called Iutto; and in Tescincu, Buppo. In the obseruation of the Lawes of this Chamis, consisteth all the politique gouernement of Iapon, both inward and outward, &c.

The king u 1.305 of Bungo, Arima, and Omur sent their Ambassadours to the Pope (then Gregorie the thirteenth) with Letters of their deuotion to his Holinesse, and had audience in the Consistorie the three and twentieth day of March Anne 1585. This was the Iesuites policie (saith x 1.306 Linschoten) to make the Iaponites to know the magnificence of Europe, & by that meanes principally to enrich themselues with gifts and priuiledges. But for a farewell to these Iaponian Iesuites, I like their being there so well, that I could wish all of that society in Europe were preaching in that Iland.

Touching the kingdome of Iapan, we can not set downe the number and order of their Kings in auncient times. It seemeth, that these last eight hundred yeres they haue beene much disquieted with ciuile warres; euery one getting as many shires or king∣domes, which in Iapan are three score and six, as he could. Nabunanga was a great Prince; and Quabacondonus a greater: both great tyrants. This last caused his Ne∣phew to be made Quabacondono, contenting himselfe with the title of Taicosama; but soone after, iealous of his greatnesse, hee forced him (after the Iaponian maner) with his companions, to kill himselfe. He hauing no children but one infant, when he was sicke and neare to death, sent for Gieiaso the chiefe of the Iaponian Nobles, Lord of eight kingdomes, and made him administrator of the kingdome till his sonne should be of age; and further to binde him hereunto, he made a marriage betwixt Gieiasoes ne••ce, two years old, and this infant of his about the same age, causing the same pre∣sently to be consummated. He took an othe of him, & the other nobles for their fealty to his sonne. But after his death there arose y 1.307 great contentions, which Gieiaso (now calling himselfe Darsusama) appeased, and after some battells against his aduersaries, inuested •••••• the Empire, Anno 1601. This hee did then in yong Taicosamas name•• •••••• hath seized the Empire fully to himselfe. And calling himselfe Cub•• •••••• (as the later Epistles testifie) hath entituled his own sonne to the Iapon ••••••. And for that cause fortifieth himselfe in Qua••to, one of his aunci∣ent •••••• and in Gieudo a towne thereof, at the charge of his subiects, of

which z 1.308 he hath had at once there working continually, from Februarie to September, three hundred thousand: hee hath raised strong fortifications, and ruleth with great policie, none daring to molest him.

CHAP. XVI.

Of the Philippina's.

IT is already shewed, that those Ilands receiued this name of Philip the second, King of Spaine, and that this name sometime is in a large sense attributed to all these Ilands in those huge Seas, but more properly to those which Legaspi discouered in the yere 1564, and where the Spa∣niards haue since that time had some places of abode: Mendenao, Ten∣daya, Luzon, and their neighbours, lying farre into the Sea before Cauchin-China & Cambaia, betwixt the seuenth degree and the twentith of Norther∣ly latitude. They are a 1.309 many in number, some of them very great, rich in rice, hony, fruits, birds, beasts, fishes, gold: and enriched further with trade from China. Seuen∣tie of these Ilands are subiects or friends to the Spaniards. Of ancient time they were subiect to the Chinois, b 1.310 vntill they did voluntarily relinquish them: the cause of much ciuile warre amongst themselues, that Anarchy prouing worse to them than a Tyran∣ny, or rather the worst tyranny, euery man becomming a Tyrant, and as he had means of wit, strength and followers, preying vpon others, vsing or selling them for slaues: which their diuisions made an easie way to the Spanish Conquest.

They worshipped the Sunne and Moone, and the men and women, which in their language they called Maganitos, obseruing in their honour solemne and sumptuous feasts. In the Illocos they worshipped the Deuill, and offered to him many sacrifices in recompence of a great quantity of gold, which they said he had giuen them. Their Feasts and Sacrifices were done by women, which were Witches (of them called Hol∣goi) reuerenced amongst them as Priests. These had ordinary talke with the Deuill, and many times in publique. These wrought strange witchcrafts; they answered vn∣to all questions that were demaunded of them: (although their answers were often either lies or riddles) they used lottes as the Chinois, and were obseruers of times. If they beganne a iourney, and met with a Lizard or other worme, they would returne home, saying, the heauens prohibited their proceeding.

They haue now amongst them many Preachers and Monasteries of the Augustini∣ans, Franciscans, and Iesuitcs. But the wicked life of the Spaniards is so offensiue to the Inhabitants, that the Discourser (himselfe a Frier) telleth heereof a notable Storie. c 1.311 A certaine Ilander soone after his baptisme, died, and appeared after to many of his Countrey-men, perswading them to be baptized, as a way vnto that happines, where∣of he now had in himselfe most blessed experience: Onely they must be baptized, and obserue the Commaundements, of which the Spaniards preached to them, of whom, and of others like vnto them, there were in that happy place infinite numbers. Here ••p∣on he vanished, and some were perswaded: but others of them refused, saying; that be∣cause there were Spaniard-souldiers in glory, they would not go thither, because they would not be in their company. A like History Bartholom de las Casas d 1.312 relateth of a Westerne Indian, at the time of his death answering to a Dominicke Ftier, which counselled him to die a Christian, and so to be capable of heauen: (when hee heard there were Spaniards in heauen) he would rather be in hell with his fore fathers then in heauen with the Spaniards.

The Spaniards e 1.313 haue their Bishop and Archdecon, and besides other Religious, seuen Colledges of Iesuites. Boterus f 1.314 saith, that the King of Spaine had thought to haue made Manilla an Archibishopricke, & added three other Bishoprickes. Captaine

Noort g 1.315 (a Dutch man that compassed the world) lost a ship heere in fight with the Spa∣niards, & suncke one of theirs: he affirmes that the conuerts of these parts, are more po∣pishly Christian then in the midst of Rome or Spaine, and more addicted to their su∣perstitious follies. In Mendenao they are Mahumetans, as they are in Burnco.

In these Philippina's h 1.316 some carue and cut their skinne, with sundry strakes and de∣uises all ouer their body. Moreouer, as we haue spoken of Balls worne in their yards, by the men of Pegu, so here, the men and men-children amongst them haue nayles of tinne thrust quite through the head of his priuy part, being split in the lower end, and riueted, which is done when they be yong, and the place groweth vp againe, without any great paine. They take it out, and put it in as occasion serueth. This here, as that in Pegu, is said to haue bin practised, to auoyde the sinne of Sodomy, whereto before they were prone. The males also are (at least in i 1.317 some of the Philippina's) circum∣cised. The people worshippe the deuill, who oft times appeareth to them in confe∣rence, in most vgly and monstrous shape. There is amongst them an Iland of Negro's inhabited with blacke people, almost as bigge as England, in nine degrees.

Heere also be those k 1.318 blacke people called Ospapuas, Man-eaters and Sorcerers, among whom Deuills walke familiarly, as Companions. If these wicked spirites find one alone, they kill him, and therefore they alwayes vse company. Their Idoles they adorne with Ostrich feathers. They vse to let themselues bloud with a certaine hearb laid to the member, and licked with the tongue: with which they can drawe out all the bloud in their body.

When as Magellan, first of all men, by the West discouered these Easterne Ilands, in the Ilands of Buthoan and Caleghan hee could learne no other Religion obserued amongst them, but that lifting vp their hands closed together, and their face towards heauen, they called on their God by the name of Abha. In Zubut (in token of friend∣ship) he and the king did let themselues bloud on the right arme, for so was their wont to confirme leagues of amity. The king had his skinne painted with a hote yron Pen∣sile: he and his people at Magellan's perswasion were baptized; and burned their I∣doles, which were made of hollow wood, with great faces and foure teeth, like bores∣tuskes in their mouthes; painted they were all ouer, but had only a fore-part, and no∣thing behinde.

They weare in their yard a naile of gold. They had many wiues, but one princi∣pall. They obserued many Ceremonies in killing a hogge, in sacrifice, as it seemed, to the Sunne. After the sounding of their cimballs, and certaine cates set downe in plat∣ters, two olde women came forth with Trumpets or Pipes of Reede, and did reue∣rence to the Sunne, and then clothing themselues with sacred vestments, one of them put about her fore-head a haire-lace with two hornes, holding another haire∣lace or skarse in her hand, and so began to sound, daunce, and call vpon the Sunne, wherein she is followed by the other, both of them in this manner dauncing about th•• Hogge, which is there fast tyed. l 1.319 The horned Beldame still muttereth certaine wordes to the Sunne, and the other answereth her: then doth shee take a cuppe of Wine, and after some Ceremonies, poureth it on the Hogge: and after that with a launce, after dances and flourishes, she killeth the Hogge. All this while a litle Torch is burning, which at last she taketh into her mouth, and biteth it: and the other wo∣man washeth the Pipes with the swines bloud, and with her finger, embrewed with bloud, marketh the forehead of her husband first, and then of the rest. Then doe they vntire themselues, and onely with women associates, ••ate the cheere in the platters: and after singe the Hogge, and eate him.

From hence Magellan went to Mathan, where in a battell with the Ilanders he was slaine. In Puladan they keep Cockes for the Game, but eate not of their flesh, forbid∣den by their superstitions. In Ciumbubon they found a tree, which had leaues like those of the Mulbery, hauing besides on each side of the leafe, as it were, two feete, with which (as if it had bin mouing and sensible) it would stirre and go vp and downe. Pigafetta kept one eight dayes in a platter, and when he rouched it, presently it would ••lee from him, and moue vp and downe: he thought it liued of the aire.

In Burneo the people are, partly Moores, & partly Gentiles, and according to their Religions, haue two Kings and two royall Cities, situated in salt-water. The Moores when they kill a hen, or a goat, vse first certaine words to the Sunne. The Gentiles m 1.320 worship the Sunne and Moone, esteeming the one Male and the other Female, him the Father, this the Mother of the Starres, whom also they reckon in the Catalogue of their demi-gods. They salute the Sunne in his morning-approch, with certaine verses and adoration: which they also performe to the Moone, and demaund of them chil∣dren, riches, and other their necessaries. After death they expect no future state. The Spaniards heard of great Pearles, as bigge as egges, which the King of Burneo had: and if you beleeue them, they tooke an Oyster themselues, whose fishie substance weighed seuen and fortie pounds. The Moore-King in Burneo was serued in his Pal∣lace and attended onely by women and maidens.

In Gilolo n 1.321 they are likewise some of the Arabian Sect, the others Gentiles. The Moores had two kings of their law, each of which had six hundred children. The Gen∣tiles vsed to worship the first thing they encounter in the morning all the day follow∣ing. They o 1.322 were sometime man-eaters; some of the Ilanders were by the Portugalls conuerted: but the King being poysoned by a Mahumetan, they declined. Yet one Noble man named Iohn, first killed his wife and children with his own hands, left they should apostatize, and then offered himselfe to indure any torment.

The Moluccos are vsually reckoned (as before is said,) but many other Ilands are subiect to them, and by some Authors called also by that name. The King of Ternate is said p 1.323 to haue seuenty Ilands vnder his subiection, and in his port representeth great maiesty. Both here and in Banda the Mahumetan superstition hath set footing, and preuailed, as in the other adioyning Ilands, the Moores being as zealous to winne Proselites, as to enrich themselues. None of these Ilands is aboue sixe leagues in com∣passe, enriched with cloues, but of other fruits barren and poore. One q 1.324 tree they haue, which out of the cut braunches yeeldeth a white, holesome, and fauourie li∣quor for drinke, they call it Tuaca, and the pith thereof affoordeth them meate called Sagu, tasting in the mouth like sowre Curds, melting like Sugar, whereof they make certaine Cakes, which will endure good for foode tenne yeares. The cloue-trees not onely sucke vp all the moysture of the Earth, where they grow, disdaining any other plant should grow neere them (like our Inclosers) sodainely drinking vp all the hea∣uens liberality in showers, but with their thirstie appetite intercept the running wa∣ters that descend from the Mountaines, before they can betake them to their mothers lappe, the Oceans refuge. In this Iland r 1.325 are men hauing anckles with spurres, like to Cockes; here are hogges with hornes: a riuer stored with fish, and yet so hote, that it flaicth of•• the skinne of any creature which entreth it: there are Oisters so large, that they christen in the shells: Crabbes so strong, that with their clawes they will breake the yron of a picke-axe: stones which grow like fish, whereof they make lime.

In Ternate s 1.326 is a mountaine, which (as it were) angry with Nature, for being fast∣ned to the earth, doth not onely lift vp his high head aboue the airy regions of clouds, but endeuoreth also to conioyne it selfe with the fiery Element, where with it seemeth to hold some entercourse, with dreadfull thunders belching out light flames, mixed with a darke smoake, like prowd Greatnesse, wasting it selfe with it owne flames, and filling the neighboring-valley with ashes, It is not much aboue a hundred yeres, since first the Sect of Mahumet entred the Moluccas. But now t 1.327 both heere and in Amboi∣no the Iesuites haue their residences, and haue perswaded many to their Catholike faith. Stephan u 1.328 ab Hagan in the yeare 1605. wanne this Iland of Amboino, and the fort of the Portugals, to the States: it is a cloue-Iland.

Much conflict was sometime betweene the kingdomes of Spaine and Portugall, a∣bout these Ilands: and some warre since betwixt. the Portugalls and Hollanders, en∣ded with the Hollanders losse. These Moluccians are treacherous, faithlesse and iea∣lous: they suffer no man to see their wiues; yea themselues see not their wiues vntill they be contracted.

In Ternate x 1.329 Theft is neuer suffered vnpunished: the Hollanders sawe a boy of e∣leuen

or twelue yeares, for stealing a leafe of Tabacco, led vp and downe with his hands bound behinde him, for a publique spectacle and derision to other boyes. They maintaine deadly warres with the Portugalls, and spare none of them that they can get. If an Eclipse of the Sunne or Moone happen, they howle and make piteous la∣mentation, perswading themselues, that their King, or some great man amongst them will die. Experience thereof was the sixt of August 1599. when the Moone was eclip∣sed about eight of the clocke at night, they euery way by crying out, by strange ge∣stures, praying, and beating their basons and drummes, expressed a lamentable passion of griefe, for the feare aforesaid. And the Eclipse being past, when they see, that nei∣ther the King, nor any other is dead, they obserue the next day solemnly festiuall with publike Procession of old and yong, of all sorts. They esteemed it a Miracle when the Hollanders told them that there were in their Country which could prognosticate of Eclipses long before. Columbus y 1.330 vsed the simplicity of the Iamaicans to his preserua∣tion: for when they forsooke him he threatned vnto them the anger of GOD, where∣of they should see an euident token in the darkening of the Moone within two daies, which according to the naturall reuolution of the Heauens (knowne to Columbus) comming to passe, the Ilanders with dread and feare shewed all readinesse to his ser∣uice.

The water about Ternate is so cleare, that they fish by the eie, and can see the An∣kers in the bottome of the water, at sixteene or seuenteene fadome depth, as if it were but a foote: and espie euerie fish which passeth, to no small aduantage of their fishing.

When the King goeth to the Mesquit, a boy goeth before, which beareth his Sword on his shoulder, and in the other hand a kidde: after him follow the kings souldiors. After them another with a Censer. Next to whom commeth the King with a Tiresol ouer his head, to keepe off the Sunne. When they are come to the dores, there are Vessels of water to wash their hands and feete, before they enter; and then the floore is couered with white Cloth, whereon they prostrate them∣selues, with their faces to the Earth, softly mumbling their Mumpsimus-deuotions. In the middest is a Pulpit, spread with white Cloth. In stead of a Bell they haue a great Drumme hanged vp, which they beat with clubbes: They haue in euery Temp∣le also one Bell, but without a Clapper. All come at that Peale, or Sound, with their weapons armed.

The Moluccians z 1.331 are better proportioned then other Indians, haue more beard (which the elder men nourish and weare long for their greater authoritie) browne of colour, and meane of stature. For valour they haue not their like in all India, es∣pecially those of Ternate, chusing rather to die then flee, and esteeming it a great credit to fight against greater multitudes. Their shields are of Wood, two spannes broad, and foure foote long. They are exceedingly addicted to slouth and ease, none working in any handicraft; their houses are of timber and reedes, without one naile in them, which their slaues build, and doe also their other labors. They haue no mo∣ney, and the siluer which they haue is employed to vessells of plate. Their riches are their Cloues, wherewith they prouide them of other necessities. They neuer see their wiues till they be married; nor the wiues them. Makian and Moher are now subiect to the king of Ternate: Tidore and Batian haue their peculiar kings. This people haue the power to elect their king, so that they choose one of the royall and ancient fami∣lie. The king of Ternate calleth himselfe king of Golilo, whereof he hath but a part, and that by conquest. The Birds of Paradise (saith this Author) haue two feet, aswell as other Birds; but as soone as they are taken, they are cut off, with a great part of their body, whereof a little is left with the head and necke, which beng hardned and dried in the Sunne, seeme to be so bred. The Moores a 1.332 made the Ilanders beleeue that they came out of Paradise, and therefore call them Manucodiata, or holie Birds, and haue them in religious accompt: They are very beautifull, with variety of fethers and colours.

Amboyna bringeth forth Orenges, Citrons, Limons, Cloues, Coquos, Bonana's, sugar-canes, and other fruits, being a very fertile Iland. The Inhabitants are simple,

liue sparingly, and are attyred like other the Moluccans. They spend much Rice, whereof they make loaues like Sugar-loaues. They haue Gallies b 1.333 after their manner, formed like Dragons, which they row very swiftly: they call them Karkollen. The Admirall came to the Hollanders with three of these, full of armed men, which row∣ed round about them, expressing manifold signes of ioy with Songs and Drummes: the slaues singing as they rowed. They had three pieces of Ordinance in euerie Galley, which they discharged, answered in that kinde by the Hollanders. But two of the Holland-shippes not finding sufficient store of commodities for them all, went to Banta, passing by Poel Setto, an Island not inhabited, bearing Northwest from Banta fiue Dutch myles. They say it is inhabited of Deuils, and whosoeuer must passe by, maketh all possible hast to be gone, much affrighted either by selfe-fancies or deuillish impostures.

Banta is foure and twentie Dutch myles from Amboyna•• and diuided into three parts, which comprehend fiue myles. The chiefe Citie is Nera. In this Island are more store of Nutmegs then elsewhere in the Moluccas: for which cause they resort hither from Iaua, China, and Malacca. They professe Mahumetisme so deuoutly, that they neuer goe to their Watches before they haue prayed in the Mesquit, where∣into they enter, being first washed (after the Mahumetane manner) but pray so loud, that they may be heard a great distance: their wordes of Prayer are Stofferolla; Stofferolla; Ascehad an la, Ascehad an la; Y••lla, Ascehad an la; Yll lolla. yll lolla, Mahumed die Rosulla: At the pronouncing of which last wordes, they stroke their hands ouer their face; in which gesture they thinke is much holinesse. Other prayers they mutter ouer very softly, with little mouing their lippes. THey stand vp∣on Mattes, and lift vp their eyes twice or thrice to Heauen: after which, they kneele downe, bowing their head twice or thrice to the earth. Thus they doe often euerie day, both at home and in the streets. They haue their publike Meetings and Bankets in their Temples very often, euery one bringing his part of the cheere: which some∣times they doe in the Woods, a hundred in a companie. At these times they consult of publike affaires.

They haue ciuill Warres, Nera and Lontoor holding together against three other Townes. Two little Islands, Pollerviin and Poelvuay take part with Nera, and when occasion requireth, come thither with their Boats to consultation, where they are entertained in publike Feasts: the manner whereof is, that they sit downe in order; in stead of a Table euery one hath a piece of a leafe of the Bonanas Tree: then is set before each a piece of Sagu bread, after that, a dish made of the leafe of another Tree, with a little sodden Rice and Flesh-pottage, which they hurle by hand∣fulls into their mouthes, deuouring rather then eating the same. In the meane while the Gentlemen arise with their weapons, and exercise themselues in marti∣all Games, with Daunces. The quarrell betwixt these Islanders grew about the cutting of certaine Trees, from whence it is come to cut and kill one another with cruell butcheries.

They exercise Sea-fights in their Caracorae, or Galeots, with great dexteritie, with great shouts and cryes, the Gentlemen dauncing on the Hatches very actiuely. They are very bloudie and barbarous, yet burie the heads of their enemies with sweet odours.

If any of their friends die, the women made a shrill and loud crie to call him a∣gaine; which not effected, they prouide a great Feast, whereunto all the kindred and friends are inuited.

They burie them almost after our fashion, in a white sheet, the corpes being carried on mens shoulders, the men first, and women after, following. A Cen∣ser is there left fuming all the day and night; and in the night they keepe a light burning in a little House, which they haue set ouer the Graue. In the morning and euening all of all sorts come and say their Prayers a long while together at the Graue: and being asked wherefore? they said, That the dead should not arise againe.

They haue a play with the ball, exercised by many of them, not as amongst vs with the hand, but with their feet, tossing the same vp into the Ayre, and taking it one of a∣nother with admirable sleight.

Before we leaue these Moluccas and their dependant Islands, we may conclude with a Tragedie, wherein blinde Superstition, and beastly crueltie, were principall Actors. When Menesius c 1.334 was Gouernour of the Portugall Fort in Ternate, he kept a Sow, which some of the deuouter Mahumetans killed. He getting the chiefe Priest (acces∣sorie to the fact) into the Castle, at his deliuerie made his face be greased with Bacon by the Iaylor, which caused the people to offer abuse to some Portugalls. Menesius in reuenge cut off the hands of two of them, the third had his hands bound behind him, and was baited with two dogges on the Sea-shore: which his implacable ene∣mies transported him into like dogged humour (though he were not with H••cuba transformed into the shape) insomuch, that fastening with his teeth on one of their eares, he held fast, till his strength failing, he sunke into the Sea with the dogge, and was drowned.

In Celebes they d 1.335 eate mans flesh. e 1.336 The King of the Moluccas was wont to send condemned persons to Celebes, to be deuoured. Castrius conuerted the King. South∣ward of Celebes is situated a little Island, where Sir Francis Drake graued his shippe. This Island is throughly growne with Woods, in which euery night cer∣taine fierie Flyes made such a light, as if euery twigge or tree had beene a burning Candle. Here they found Battes as bigge as Hennes, and plentie of Cray-fishes so great, that one would suffice foure men to their dinner: they digged themselues holes in the Earth, like Conies.

From hence they sayled to Iaua; of which name M. Paulus and Nic. di Conti re••∣kon two great Islands, ascribing to the one two thousand, and to the other three thou∣sand myles in circuit. The lesse is neere to the firme Land of the South Continent, where Beach, and some other Prouinces, are named by Paulus and Vertomannus, of Heathenish Superstitions. The lesse Iaua had in the dayes of M. Paulus eight King∣domes, in six of which himselfe had beene, which he nameth Felech, wherein the ru∣rall inhabitants were Idolaters, the Citizens Moores: the Idoll-worshippers eare any flesh whatsoeuer, of man, or beast, and obserue all day what they first see in the mor∣ning.

Basma f 1.337 the second, acknowledged the great Chams Soueraigntie, but payed him no tribute. Here were certaine Vnicornes, headed like a Swine, footed like an Ele∣phant, with one ••or••e on their forheads (with which they doe not hurt any, but to that end vse certaine prickles that grow on their tongues;) They delight also in the Myre like Swaine. Here are little Apes, much resembling men in their countenance, which they vsed to preserue with certaine Spices, hauing flayed off their skinnes, and left the haire growing in those parts, where Nature causeth men to be hairie, and fell them to Merchants, to be carried ouer the world as the bodies of little men; happily the onely true Pygmies the world yeeldeth.

In Samara, the third of those Kingdomes, none of the North-starres can be seene. They are Man-eaters, and Idolaters; but not so brutish as in Dragoian, the next King∣dome: where, if a man be sicke, his kinsmen consult with their Sorcerers, who enquire of the Deuill, Whether he shall escape, or no? And if the answere be Negatiue, they send for certaine men, specially designed to that villanous Mysterie, which strangle him; and then they dresse and eate him amongst the kindred, euen to the very marrow in his bones. For (say they) if any flesh should remaine, it would putrifie, and wormes would breede thereof, which after (for want of sustenance) would perish, whereby the soule of the dead partie would be much tonnented. The bones they burie safely, that no Beast should touch them: such dread haue they of Beasts and crueltie in a more then beastly crueltie, and such a care to obserue humanitie ••nd pietie in a most impious inhumanitie.

Lambri, the next Kingdome, hath in it some men with tayles, like dogges, a spanne long.

The last is Fanfur, where they liue of bread made of the pith of Trees, the wood whereof is heauie, and sinketh to the bottome, if it be put in water, like yron, and therefore they make Launces thereof, able to pierce Armour: for it is three-fingers thicke betwixt the hollow and the barke.

To let passe Pentan, Sondar, and other idolatrous Islands, and come to Iaua Maior: This Countrey is very rich, but in times past of most abhominable custome. N 1.338 Nic. Conti sayth, That they seede on Cats, Rats, and other vermine, and were most vile murthe∣rers, not sticking to make tryall of the good cutting or thrust of their blades on the next bodie they met with, and that without punishment, yea (if the blow or' thrust were deliuered with fine force) with much commendation. Vertomannus g 1.339 affirmeth of them, That some obserue Idols, some the Sunne or Moone, others an Oxe, and ma∣ny the first thing they meet in the morning, and some worship the Deuill. When men were old, and not able longer to work, their children or parents carried them into the market, and sold them to others, which did eate them. And the like they vsed with the younger sort in any desperate sicknesse, preuenting Nature with a violent death, and esteeming their bellies sitter sepulchres then the earth, accounting others fooles which suffered the wormes to deuoure so pleasant foode. For feare of these man-eaters they stayed not long there. It seemeth that they haue much left these bruitish customes, since wonne to more ciuilitie by the trading of Moores and Christians; especially such as are of the Arabian Law: although, as our owne countreymen report, which haue there liued, a mans life is valued to the murtherer at a small summe of mony. They are a proud Nation: h 1.340 If a man should come in where they are set on the ground after their manner, & should sit on a Chest, or high thing, it were as much as his life were worth.

When they are sicke, i 1.341 they vow vnto GOD, vpon their recouerie, a more honoura∣ble death, which they performe after their recouerie, by the murtherous hand of some other vpon them. They are k 1.342 great Inchanters, and obserue houres, and sitting minutes and moments of time, for composing their Blades and Armour, of which they are con∣ceited, that, being tempered with their Charmes and Superstitions, with the least drawing bloud of another, they will kill him; themselues, in their inchanted Armour, safe from others blowes. They abide in expectation of these Martiall minutes, for their coniured Armours, sometimes eight or tenne yeares, before they can finish them. The Iauans l 1.343 say, That their auncestors came from China, which Countrey they for∣sooke, because of the tyranuie where with they were oppressed, & in great multitudes peopled this Island. They weare their haire and their nailes long. They are dutifull to their superiors. The great men stir••e not forth, without a great troupe of followers. They are seldome idle, much busied about their Scabberds and Weapons, which they vse to poyson. They are not without their weapons night or day, which they will not suffer another man to touch. They are so eager of reuenge, that they will presse on their aduersaries weapon, drawing it through their owne bodie, to kill him that hath wounded them. They haue Mahumetane Temples, where they doe their deuotions with great silence. They acknowledge IESVS, Mahomet, Dauid, and Moses foure Prophets. They obserue their houres, and two Fasts, or Lents. The great mens wiues neuer goe out of the dores to be seene. Their Cities are Ballambua, and Panarucan, (a little from whence is a burning Hill, which first brake forth 1586, and oppressed infinit numbers of men, and cast great stones into the Citie, for three daies space making one continued night of darknesse) Passarua, the King whereof married the King of Ballam∣buas daughter, and the second night after he had lyen with her, slew her and her atten∣dants, because she would not turne Mahumetan. Ioartam, Surrabaia, Tuban, Matara, are also royall Cities, as are Daunia, Taggal, Charabaon, and many others. But Bantam is of most trafficke, frequented by Portugalls, Dutch, and English, in which euery day are three seuerall Markets. Here Merchants, when they come, may buy a woman for their ••leshly & worldly businesse (you may adde the Deuill too, to make vp the nūber) which at their departure they fell againe. Publike affaires are treated and handled by night, at which time the Counsellors of State meet, & ascend some tree, or the roofe of the house, viewing the heauens till the Moon arise, & then goe into the Senat-house.

Not farre from Bantam m 1.344 liue certaine of the Passarrans, which being there oppres∣sed by their King, came hither, and here obtained a piece of ground, to build them a Citie, which is called Sura. They haue a King, or Gouernour, and liue quietly, fol∣lowing Husbandrie: they eate nothing that hath life (a common Superstition of the Indians) weare white Clothes of Paper, made of the leaues of Trees, and neuer mar∣rie (herein resembling the Iewish Essees) yet neuer want succeeding generation: Many of the Iauans daily consecrating themselues vnto their Societie. The Chinois in Iaua doe sometimes bring vp Crocodiles, and eat them.

The King of Tuban n 1.345 is the richest King, and mightiest in all Iaua. They haue ma∣ny Horses, and make great account of them, decking them with gallant furniture of Gold, Siluer, and the counterfeits of Dragons and Deuils on their Saddles: they ride and manage their Horses with great skill.

Madura is North from Iaua, a fertile Island of Rice, the soyle whereof is so moist and waterish, that their Buffalls and men goe almost knee-deepe, when they sow it. Arosbay is the chiefe Citie. They are theeuish, and giuen to spoyle, and captiued ma∣ny of the Hollanders, which went thither on shore, to buy commodities; which they were forced to redeeme at a deere rate. In these parts, are Battes as bigge as Hennes, which the people rost and eate.

The Island Bali is very populous, containing (as is thought) sixe hundred thousand inhabitants; they are Ethnikes, and worship that which they first meete in the mor∣ning. Here and in Pulo Rossa the women are burned with their dead husbands: one man is said o 1.346 to haue had fiftie of his wiues (for they marrie as many as they please) bur∣ned with him, whiles the Hollanders were there. The Island hath many Buls, Buffals, Goats, Swine, Horse, with many kindes of Fowles, Fruits, and Mettalls: The chiefe men are carried by slaues on seats borne on their shoulders, or else in Chariots drawne with Buffalls.

In the Voyage of M. Thomas Candish p 1.347 is mention made of a Iauan King, called Raia Balombam, very aged, which had a hundred wiues, and his sonne had fiftie. Their custome is, that when the King dieth, they burne the bodie, and preserue the ashes. Fiue dayes after the wiues of the dead King goe to a place appointed, and there shee which was deerest in his fauour, throweth a ball from her; and where that ball resteth, thither they goe all, and turning their faces Eastward, stabbe themselues with a Crise or Dagger to the heart. They are very resolute people, and dread no at∣tempt which the King shall enioyne them, be it neuer so dangerous. All the race of this King Ballamboam was rased and vtterly destroyed by the Passarvan, after a long siege: which Warre was begun in the bloud of the King of Ballamboams daugh∣ter, whome hee slew, as is before sayd, and added this Drunkennesse vnto his thirst.

Iortam, or Ioartam q 1.348 containeth about a thousand households. The inhabitants are Ethnikes, and haue their Temples in Woods, to which they resort to say and doe their Holies at noone, before their deformed Deuill-formed Pagodes. In this Citie dwelleth the chiefe Pope, or High-Priest, of that Superstition, whose autho∣ritie is great in all those parts. He was a hundred and twentie yeares old, and had many wiues which nourished him with their milke, being not able to take o∣ther sustenance: a deadly enemie to the Christians, whome the King did yet with some Priuiledges fauour.

CHAP. XVII.

Of Samatra, and Zeilan.

SAmatra is esteemed by some a 1.349 the greatest of the Easterne Islands, stretching it selfe almost seuen hundred miles in length, in breadth a∣boue two hundred. The Ayre is not very holesome, by reason of the situation vnder the Line, and the multitude of Lakes and Riuers, whereout the Sunne drinketh more then hee can well concoct, and therefore (as it were) belcheth out here continually such crude and vn∣digested vapours. Their foode is Millet, Rice, Sagu, and Fruits. Their riches are Pep∣per, Ginger, Cassia, Silke, Benioyn, Gold, Tinne, Yron, &c. The Kingdome of Campa is full of Trees, whose pith or marrow is Aloe, which is prized in India at the like weight (some say) of Gold; the Barke is called Aquila. In the Sea-coast they are Moores in Religion, and so haue beene about these last two hundred yeares: vp with∣in Land they are Pagans, and in many places, as in the Kingdomes of Andragiri and Aru, they are Man-eaters. They were diuided, before the Portugalls entred India, in∣to nine and twentie Kingdomes, whereof the chiefe was Pedir, after that Pacem, and now Acem. For Abram, sometime a slaue, since King of Acem, hath conquered al∣most all the North part of the Island, and with helpe from the Turke and the Arabians distresseth sometimes the affaires of Malacca. This King b 1.350 gaue in marriage with his daughter, to the King of Ior, a peece of Ordinance, such as for greatnesse, length, and workmanship can hardly be matched in all Christendome. Here is a c 1.351 Hill, called Balalvanus, which continually burneth; and a Fountaine (as is reported) which run∣neth pure Balsame: Others d 1.352 thinke, that this was Chersonesus Aurea, of the Aun∣ients.

Galvanus e 1.353 writeth, That the Bacas, or Man-eaters, in the Mountaines of Samatra, gild their teeth, and esteeme the flesh of blacke people sweeter then of the white. The flesh of their Kine, Buffes, and Hennes, is as blacke as Inke. They say, That there are certaine people there called Daragni Dara, which haue tayles like to Sheepe. Here is said also to grow a Tree, the iuice whereof is strong poyson, and if it touch the bloud of a man, killeth him, but if a man drinke of it, it is a soueraigne Antidote. As for those tailed-people (a slander by Beckets Legend f 1.354 reported of some Kentish men, iniurious to that angrie Saint, and after applyed to our whole Nation; many indeede esteeming the English to be tayled) Galvano affirmeth, That the King of Tidore told him, that in the Islands of Batto-China there were some which had tayles, hauing also a thing like vnto a dugge betweene their coddes, out of the which there came Milke.

Nicolo di Conti g 1.355 sayth, in his time the Samatrans were all Gentiles, and the Man∣eaters amongst them used the skulls of their eaten enemies in stead of money, exchan∣ging the same for their necessaries; and he was accounted the richest man, which had most of those skulls in his house. In Vertomannus time they had money in Pedir, narked on the one side with a Deuill, on the other with a Chariot, drawne with Ele∣phants. Their h 1.356 Religion (hee sayth) is the same with those of Tarnasseri, burning heir wiues in like manner. The inhabitants are cunning Artificers, Marchants, and Saylers: their Shippes haue at each end a Prow, which with maruellous agilitie they can dispose forwards, or backwards, making vse of the same, according to he diuersitie of Winde and Channell, which there are verie changeable.

In Acen i 1.357 are Mesquits of Timber and Reede, with the Vessells of Water at the entrie for them to wash, according to the Arabian custome. The King comes little a∣broad, nor may any goe to him, except hee bee sent for by an Officer with a gilded Staffe, or Dagger.

To his Palace they passe through seuen Gates one after another, garded with wo∣men, expert at their weapon, and vsing both Peeces and Swords. Hee hath none o∣ther gard for his person. In saluting the King, they lay their hands foulded on their head, which in other salutations they lay on the forhead. It is thought, that the pre∣sent King was sometime a Fisherman. He is a Mahumetan.

In Macazar (an Island not farre from the former) the most are Ethnickes, some also Moores, and some Christians. They vse the Malaican, or Malaian, Tongue, which is generall through the Indies. Their Arrow-heads are of Fish-bones, enueno∣med with incurable poyson. In Macazar the Priests conforme, or rather deforme, themselues to the fashion of women, nourishing their haire on the head, and plucking it out of the face: they guild their teeth, and vse broken, wanton, and effeminate ge∣stures. They are called Becos; they marrie one another. For them to lye with a wo∣man, is capitall, and is punished with burning in Pitch. These Men-monsters, Women-Deuills, were great impediments to the Portugalls, in drawing them to Christianitie.

Zeilan (which some call Seylon, other Ceilan) is by Barrius auerred to be Ta∣probana: sometimes (according to M. Paul k 1.358 his Reports) thought to haue compre∣hended three thousand sixe hundred myles in circuit; since much impaired by his ouer-mightie neighbour the Sea, which hath now left not aboue two hundred and fiftie myles in length, and a hundred and fortie of breadth vnto it. I 1.359 The Indians call it Tenarisim, or the delitious Land, and some are of opinion, that this was Para∣dise. So iust are the iudgements of the Highest, that, when as man wandered from him, caused him also to wander from himselfe, and from his habitation: yea, the place it selfe hath also wandered, in mens wandering conceits, ouer the World, yea, and out of our habitable World altogether, as before is shewed; men now seeking it as vain∣ly as before they lost it. It is in fashion m 1.360 resembling an egge, by a shallow channell separated from the Cape Comori. The Heauens with their deawes, the Ayre with a pleasant holesomenesse and fragrant freshnesse, the Waters in their many Riuers and Fountaines, the Earth diuersified in aspiring Hills, Iow•••••• Vales, equall and indifferent Plaines, filled in her inward Chambers with Mettalls and Iewells, in her outward Court and vpper face stored with whole Woods of the best Cinnamon that the Sunne seeth, besides Fruits, Oranges, Leimons, &c. surmounting those of Spaine; Fowles and Beasts, both tame and wilde (among which is their Elephant n 1.361 , honoured by a natu∣rali acknowledgement of excellence, of all other Elephants in the world.) These all haue conspired and ioyned in common League, to present vnto Zeilan the chiefe of worldly treasures and pleasures, with a long and healthfull life in the inhabitants, to enioy them. No maruell then, if sense and sensualitie haue here stumbled on a Para∣dise. There, wooddie Hills (as a naturall Amphitheatre) doe encompasse a large Plaine: and one of them, as not contenting his beetle-browes with that only prospect, disdaineth also the fellowship of the neighbouring Mountaines, lifting o 1.362 vp his steepe head seuen Leagues in height; and hath in the toppe a Plaine, in the middest whereof is a stone of two Cubits, erected in manner of a Table, holding in it the print of •• mans foote, who (they say) came from Deli thither, to teach them Religion. The Iogues and other deuout Pilgrims resort thither, from places a thousand Leagues di∣stant, with great difficultie of passage both hither and here. For they are forced to mount vp this Hill by the helpe of nailes and chaines fastened thereto. Nature hauing prohibited other passage. Maffoeus and Boterus could persuade themselues, that this foot-steppe is a relike and memorie of the Aethiopian Eunuch: others will haue it farther fet, and father it on Adam, the first father of mankinde, of whom the Hill also is named, Pico de Adam. The Moores p 1.363 call it Adam Baba, and say, That from thence Adam ascended into Heauen. The Pilgrims are clad in their Pal••ners-weed, with yron chaines, and skinnes of Lyons, and other wilde Beasts. Vpon their armes and legges they weare buttons with sharpe points, that cut the flesh, and draw bloud, which (they say) they doe in GODS seruice.

Before they come at the mountaine, they passe by a fenny valley full of water, wherein they wade vp to the waste, with kniues in their hands, to scrape from their legges the bloud-leeches, which else would end their pilgrimage and life before the time. For this durtie and watery passage continueth eighteene miles, before they come at the hill, whose proud top would disdaine climing, if Art did not captiue Nature, and binde the hill with chaines of iron, as is said. When they are mounted, they wash them in a lake or poole of cleere springing water, neere to that foote-stone, and ma∣king their prayers, doe thus account themselues cleane from all their sinnes. This holy iourney is generally performed by the Ilanders (saith Vertomannus) once a yeare. He addeth q 1.364 that a Moore told him, that his foot-print was two spannes long: and that Adam heere a long time bewailed his sinne, and found pardon. But Odo∣ricus affirmeth, that they reported this mourning to haue beene for Abel, and to haue lasted three hundred yeares, and of the teares of Abel and Eue this purifying water to haue proceeded: which Odoricus r 1.365 proued to be a tale, because he saw the water springing continually, and it runneth thence into the sea. He saith that this water had in it many precious stones; and the King gaue leaue at certaine times of the yeare to poore men to take them, that they might pray for his soule; which they could not doe, but first annointed with Limons, because of the horseleeches in that water. A∣dams hill is supposed to be seuen leagues in height. In Candy s 1.366 were statues artificial∣ly wrought fiue or sixe fathomes high, which these Symmetrians proportioned to the stature of Adam, gathered by that print of his foot.

In Vintane, t 1.367 is a Pagode or Idol-temple, the compasse whereof is an hundred and thirtie paces: it is very high, and all white except on the toppe, which hath the spires thereof gilded, in so much that men are not able, when the Sunne shineth, to looke thereon. It hath a Tower or square Steeple of excellent workmanshippe. There are many other Temples, and a Monasterie also of Religious persons, which are attired in yellow, haue their crownes shauen, with Beads in their hands, and alwayes seeme to mumble ouer somewhat of their deuout orisons, being in high estimation of san∣ctitie with the vulgar, and freed from publike labours and burthens. Their Monaste∣rie is built after the manner of the Popish, being also gilded with gold. In their Chap∣pells are many Images of both sexes, which they say represent some of their Saints: they are set on the Altars, and are cloathed with garments of gold and siluer. Before them are the Images of Boyes, which beare vp great Candle-stickes, with waxe-can∣dles burning therein night and day. Euery houre they resort to these Altars to their Mumpsimus. They held a solemne Procession, whiles the Hollanders were there, in which their Abbot rode on an Elephant richly attired, lifting vp his hands ouer his head, with a golden rodde therein: the Monkes went two and two before him in or∣der, partly bearing, and playing on many Instruments of Musicke, partly bearing wax∣lights and torches: the men also, and after them the women and maids, followed in like order: and the fairest Virgins were busied with games and dances, being naked from the nauell vpwards, beneath couered with smockes of diuers colours, their armes and eares adorned with gold and iewels. Any man that should see it (saith our Author) would thinke, our Westerne Monkes had hence borrowed their Ceremonies. Their Images are in euery corner of the way, which they adorne with flowers. In Candy, the chiefe Citie of that Kingdome, were Pagodes innumerable. The houses or Temples were of stone, like the Temples in these parts: some statues were as high as the mast of a shippe. The people heere, if they haue once touched meate, which for quantitie or qualitie they cannot eat, they cast it to the dogges: neither will any man (be he neuer so meane) eat that which another hath touched. The women goe naked from the waste vpwards. They marry as many wiues as they can keepe.

The King makes vse of their superstition: For pretending to build Temples, hee after leaues them vnperfect, excusing himselfe, that they had not contributed suffici∣ent summes of money, and therefore exacteth a new. There is one statue of great sta∣ture, with a sword in his hand, which by illusion of the Diuell (if it be not the delusi∣on

of fabulous reports) made as though he would strike the King with his sword, as he was entering the Temple, and put him in great feare, whereas before he had made a mocke of it. The Singales or Natiue Inhabitants say that the world shall not pe∣rish as long as that Image continueth safe. When any one is sicke, hee sacrificeth to the Diuell, hauing a boxe hanging in his house to that end, therein to gather somewhat for his offering. Some pray vnto the Image of an Elephants head, made of wood or stone, that they may obtaine wisedome (whereof this prayer argues their great want): some eate no quicke creature. They eat no beefe, nor drinke any wine; they worship whatsoeuer first meeteth them in the morning.

George Spilberge was bountifully entertained of the King of Candy, u 1.368 but Sebald de Weert was with diuers of his companions slaine, after he had receiued much kind∣nesse of the King; his importunitie to get the King into his ship, making him suspect some treacherie.

The King of Morecalo had eares adorned with iewels, and hanging downe (the lappets of them were so stretched) to his shoulders. He was kinde to the Hollanders: but they incensed him against them by killing certaine Kine; for some of them said, that the soules of Kine slaine after that manner, were hurled forthwith into hell. Hee obserued one Pagode, to whose feast he went while the Hollanders were there, the so∣lemnitie whereof was to continue ten dayes, till a new Moone, with great concourse of deuout persons.

Of the superstitions of Perimal, and the worshippe of the Apes tooth, celebrated in this Iland; we haue alreadie shewed in the Chapter * 1.369 of Narsinga. The Cinga∣lan language which they speake in this Iland, is x 1.370 thought to haue beene there left by the Chinois, sometimes Lords of Zeilan. Yet in M. Paulus his dayes the Tartari∣ans had not pierced thus farre. For the King then raigning, refused to sell to Cublai Can (then the greatest Monarch in the world) at a price, a Ruby which hee had left him by his Ancestours, esteemed the richest iewell in the world, being (as he y 1.371 saith) a spanne long, and as bigge as a mans arme, cleere and shining, as if it had beene a fire. In this Iland were reckoned nine Principalities or Kingdomes, but z 1.372 not long since their chiefe King was murthered by a Barber, who draue the other Kings out of the Countrey, and vsurped the Monarchie to himselfe, practising hostilitie against the Portugalls.

The Cingalas are very cunning Artificers in all mettalls. One of them presented the Arch-bishoppe of Goa with a Crucifix, so cunningly wrought, as if he had gi∣uen life to the Image of one dead. Hee sent it to the King of Spaine as a rare iewell, not to be equalled in Europe.

The Inhabitants heere are actiue and expert in Iugling, both men and women, trauelling through India with their strange Hobby-horses, to get money by this va∣nitie. The Sea-coast (as in other Indian Ilands) is inhabited with Moores, the Inland with Pagans.

The Portugalls haue a fortresse at Colombo. The Ilanders a 1.373 are not warriours: they giue themselues to pastime and pleasure: they goe naked from the girdle vp∣ward: they make wide holes in their eares, which they stretch out with the waight of their iewels to their shoulders.

The Hollanders found exceeding, both good and bad, entertainment with the King of Candy. Now for that question, whether Zeilan or Samatra be that Tapro∣bane of the Ancient is very doubtfull. Yet that report in Pliny b 1.374 of Taprobane seemes more to encline for Zeilan. For hee saith, that in Claudius time, a seruant of Annius Plocamus, which was Customer for the Red-sea, was carried from the Coast of Arabia, besides Carmania, in fifteene dayes, which I thinke could not possi∣bly be done to Samatra. Likewise the excellencie of the Elephants beyond all the Indian agrees to Zeilan: and had Samatra beene so knowne at that time, the other parts of India (it is like) had beene better discouered then they were in those times. This Taprobane was discouered to bee an Iland, by Onesicritus, Alexanders Ad∣mirall

of his Fleet in these parts. It was then accounted another world, and therefore shall be the Period of our PILGRIMAGE, and Perambulation in this Part of the World: which (by the gracious goodnesse of his Almightie guide) the Pilgrime ha∣uing passed: before he venture vpon the Monster-breeding Africa, he thinkes it not amisse to repose himselfe in so pleasant an Iland; where he may at leisure looke backe, and view the ruines of so many mightie Monarchies, puissant Kingdomes, stately Ci∣ties, and renowned States, which by the wise, iust and prouident hand of the Dispo∣ser of Kingdomes, haue had their fatall Periods, and giuen place; some to Barbarisme, and some to their succeeding heires (sprung out of their ashes) flourishing in greater glorie then their predecessours.

Heere may he likewise behold many beautious Nymphes (daughters of Asia) lif∣ting vp their Virgin-lookes to view the world: which, putting off their maskes (that haue heretofore veiled their beauties from the bright eye of fairer Europe) doe giue good hope of future discoueries in those parts, which yet lurke vnder that obscure cur∣taine of Terra Incognita. Acknowledging both in the one and the other (as the Al∣mighty power of him that brings all this to passe, so) his bountifull mercie to that land, which he hath separated from the rest of the world; not so much by a sea of wa∣ters, as by that boundlesse Ocean of his grace and fauour, from whence flow those eternall waters of life, which this Nation aboue other Nations enioyeth. Heere hath he built a Temple for his TRVTH, and planted Oliues round about it. Heere hath he crowned that TRVTH, with prosperitie and plentie of all things. Heere hath he decreed to establish that TRVTH, to be a faithfull witnesse on Earth, so long as the Sunne shall endure in Heauen; if the ingratitude of such people, so fauoured, doe not compell him to turne away his face in displeasure. Which fearefull Curse to auert, the Pilgrime doth againe betake him to his Beads: beseeching the LORD of Heauen and Earth, who doth whatsoeuer he will both in Heauen and in Earth, to turne away that wrath (which by manifold examples he hath warned vs of in other parts) which wee haue as deepely deserued as any. And that hee would still be pleased to lift vp the light of his louing countenance vpon vs, in vouchsafing vs that Saint (his Vna Veritas) to be our guide for euer. To that Saint is this voyage intended: which (af∣ter a * 1.375 Domini est terra, and a Gloria Patri, for the conclusion of his Orisons) the Religious Traueller shall be readie to prosecute.

Notes

• a 1.1

  Ptol.lib.7.
• b 1.2

  Mercat.tab.••muers.Magin. G••ag. G. Arthus bi••. Ind. Or.
• c 1.3

  M. Paulus lib.3.
• d 1.4

  Nig.Com. As.x.
• e 1.5

  Diodor.Sic.lib.2.cap 5. Ex Ctesia.
• f 1.6

  Caelius Rhodig.lib.18.cap.31.
• g 1.7

  Strab.lib.15. S.Aurel, Victor.
• h 1.8

  Plin.l.6.c.19. Ar.lib.8.
• i 1.9

  Brachmanes.
• k 1.10

  The Indian Germanes.
• l 1.11

  Practise of prescribed pa∣tience.
• m 1.12

  The like stubbornnesse is yet in their Iogbies.
• n 1.13

  Arr. calleth him Dandanis.lib.7.
• o 1.14

  Nic. Damasc. Suetonius men∣tioneth this, in vita Augusti.cap.21.
• p 1.15

  Io. Boem.
• q 1.16

  Am. Marcel.lib.23.
• r 1.17

  Arrian.lib.1.
• s 1.18

  Dorotheus in vita Barthol. & Th••m.
• t 1.19

  Pseudo Abdias. Bab.Epise.
• u 1.20

  Gen.di.lib.6.cap.26.
• x 1.21

  Solin.cap.55.
• y 1.22

  Plin.l.7.c.2.
• z 1.23

  Al.ab.Al.lib.4.cop.17.
• a 1.24

  Laur. Coruin.
• b 1.25

  Arrian.lib.5.
• c 1.26

  Arrian.lib.6.
• d 1.27

  Arrian.lib.7.
• e 1.28

  Euseb.de praep. Euang. lib.6.cap.8.
• f 1.29

  Tusc.quaest.lib.5.
• g 1.30

  Phil.l.2.c.4.
• h 1.31

  Cap.9.
• i 1.32

  Lib.3.cap.1.
• k 1.33

  Cap.3.
• l 1.34

  Cap.4.
• a 1.35

  Magin.
• b 1.36

  Discourse of China, p.381.
• c 1.37

  Gi.Bot.Ben.
• d 1.38

  Summario di pop.orientali.
• e 1.39

  Nauigatio. Iac.Neccij per Cornel.Nicolai.
• f 1.40

  Magin.G.Bot.Ben.
• g 1.41

  Discourse of China, p.390.
• h 1.42

  G. Bot.B••••.l.2.part.3.
• i 1.43

  Maginus. G.Bot.Ben.
• k 1.44

  Ioan.Bar.l.9.c.2.
• l 1.45

  Cas.Frid.
• m 1.46

  Linscho••. R.Fitch.
• n 1.47

  Ioan.Bar.l.9.
• o 1.48

  G.Arthus Dantisc. Hist. Ind.Oriene.pag.333.
• p 1.49

  Navig.Iacob.Neccij.
• * 1.50

  The Hollan∣ders saw many men & women of China in their Boats, which were Fishers, and dwelt in them: but saw not a Portugall, nor could procure any of the o∣ther, at any summe, to de∣liuer them a letter on shore. After 1603, the Hollanders tooke a rich shippe of the Portugals at Macao, laden for Iapan. Cornel.de Vena.
• r 1.51

  A merrie madnesse of Euery one in his ••••••mor.
• s 1.52

  See the next Chapter of another way to take them.
• t 1.53

  ••o.Herinannis•• Hist. Nav.ab 1602. a••.604.
• u 1.54

  Step. •••••• gen.
• x 1.55

  Corn. Mateliy. Navig. & pug. Amstelodam. Hist. 10, Isacij Pontani.
• y 1.56

  India Orien∣talis, partes ••. per T. & is.de Bry.
• a 1.57

  G.B••••.Ben.
• b 1.58

  N. Pime••ta lit. F.Fernandez.
• c 1.59

  Hard Wax.
• d 1.60

  Fredericke saith he had 2 & crowned kings at commaund, and that no King in the World was of greater power.
• e 1.61

  There were destroyed by this flame and execution 4000 persons. Arthus pag.326. & Caspar Balby, c.37. hath the same number, saying, That all the Citi∣zens of Pegu were inioyned to be present at the execution. He cals the place not-a-Wood, but a Prison. He was then at Pegu.
• f 1.62

  I•••••• piscator sapi••.
• g 1.63

  The cruell tyranny of the K. of Pegu.
• h 1.64

  Iudas cannot be secure, till he hang him∣selfe,
• i 1.65

  A Boues.
• k 1.66

  A cruell pu∣nishment of Cowards.
• l 1.67

  1588. M.R. Fitch. Cas. Fred.
• m 1.68

  Linscot••
• n 1.69

  R. Fitch. 28.cal. Balbye c. 38.
• o 1.70

  Lins••••••
• p 1.71

  Histor.Indiae Orien.pag.313.
• q 1.72

  Cas.Fred.
• r 1.73

  R.Fitch.
• a 1.74

  R.Fitch. Cas.Fred••rike.
• b 1.75

  Cas.Balby saith that ma∣ny of these Vareles were burned, toge∣ther with foure thousand hou∣sand houses in Pegu by neg∣ligence of a Portugall Marriner.
• c 1.76

  Balby c.38.
• d 1.77

  Fernandes Epist.
• e 1.78

  R. Frith.
• f 1.79

  G.B.B.l.part 3 Arthus pag. 319.
• g 1.80

  Part 1.l.2.
• h 1.81

  Caspar. Balby. Got. Arthus. histor. Indiae. Pag. 321.
• i 1.82

  C. Balby C, 39.
• k 1.83

  Sapan. Giachie
• l 1.84

  Sapan Catena.
• m 1.85

  Sapan Daiche
• n 1.86

  Sapan Dunan.
• o 1.87

  Sapan Giaimoseg••enon.
• p 1.88

  Caspar Balby was there with other Mer∣chants, which saw him wee∣ping.
• q 1.89

  C. Balby.
• r 1.90

  Balby ca.42.,
• a 1.91

  M••gin. Gin. Bet. Ben. Got. Arthus hist. ••••d Orient. pag. 282.
• b 1.92

  Linschot. ca. 16.
• c 1.93

  Adulterie punished.
• d 1.94

  Linschot. c. 47
• e 1.95

  Lud. Vert.lib.1.ca.19.
• f 1.96

  Gesner ••••s de Quadrup.
• g 1.97

  Gi Bot. Ben.
• h 1.98

  Balby ca. 4••.
• i 1.99

  R. Fitch.
• k 1.100

  Hier. •••••• Eman. Pin.
• l 1.101

  Pardaw is three testons Portugale.
• m 1.102

  M. Pimenta.
• n 1.103

  R. Fitch.
• o 1.104

  The manner of their marri∣ages.
• p 1.105

  A right nig∣gard..
• q 1.106

  R. Fitch.
• r 1.107

  Linschot.
• s 1.108

  N. Pimenta.
• t 1.109

  Hi••er relatio de reg•• Mogor.
• a 1.110

  1595, & 1599.
• b 1.111

  Relat.de Reg. Mog.
• c 1.112

  Of the great Mogor his pu∣issance, riches, and other qua∣lities Pierre du larric hath largely written l.4. de histoire des Indes Or.c.8
• d 1.113

  The vncer∣tainetie of his Religion.
• e 1.114

  loan. Oranus.
• f 1.115

  Hier. Xauier.
• g 1.116

  ••man Pinner.
• h 1.117

  Narratio reg. Mogor.
• i 1.118

  R. Fitch.
• k 1.119

  ••o. Busa••••.
• a 1.120

  Maginus.
• b 1.121

  Mass.l.4.
• c 1.122

  Ioseph. Ind. Linsch.l.1.c.27.
• d 1.123

  L. Vertom.••.4.
• e 1.124

  ••d. Barbosa.
• f 1.125

  Cael Rhod. l.11 c.13.
• g 1.126

  Moff. l.11.
• h 1.127

  Rel.reg Mog.
• i 1.128

  Cicer. Offic.
• k 1.129

  Maff. Hist. Ind.l.11.
• l 1.130

  This same man appeared before Solyman the Turkish General, at the siege of Diu. Viag.divn Co∣mite Venetian••.
• m 1.131

  Dam. a Goes, op. Di. •••••• bell, Camb.
• n 1.132

  Linschot.
• o 1.133

  Od. Barbosa.
• p 1.134

  Gotardus Ar∣thus Hist. India Orient.c.23.
• q 1.135

  Gar••, ab Horte Hist. Plant.l.a.c.28.
• r 1.136

  Xaholam, i. Lord of the world.
• s 1.137

  Daquem.
• t 1.138

  Ios.Scal.de Emend.temp.l.7.
• u 1.139

  Ios.Scal.Can.Isag.l.3.
• x 1.140

  L.Veri.l.4.
• y 1.141

  ••man. Pinner.
• z 1.142

  An. Do.1595.
• a 1.143

  The Religi∣ous in Cam∣baia.
• b 1.144

  Em. Pinner.
• c 1.145

  One ficritus re∣porteth the like of the Gymnoso∣phists.
• d 1.146

  Linsch.c.37. Andrea Corsali.
• e 1.147

  Od. Barbosa.
• f 1.148

  The like low∣sie tricke is re∣ported in the Legend of S. Francis, and in the life of Igna∣tius, of one of the first Iesui∣ticall pillars, by Maffaeus.
• g 1.149

  N.di Cont.
• a 1.150

  Gi. Bot. Ben. Maff.lib. 1. Linsch. I. 1.c.34.
• b 1.151

  Gio-R••t.Ben. Garcias ab Horto, ••.2.c.28. Linschot. &c.
• c 1.152

  Linscho.lib.1.cap.27.
• d 1.153

  Vide supra.cap.7.
• e 1.154

  Of Goa, reade Arthus histor. Ind.c. 25. & Linschot.
• f 1.155

  Linschot.lib. 1.cap.28. 29. 30. 31. 32.
• a 1.156

  Ceremonies at the death of a Bramene.
• b 1.157

  R. Fitch.
• c 1.158

  Linschoten.
• d 1.159

  Gi.Bot.Ben.lib.2.part.3.Maff.lib.1.
• f 1.160

  Od. Barbosa.
• g 1.161

  Od. Barbosa.
• h 1.162

  Betelle, a leafe.
• i 1.163

  Sumario di pop orient.
• k 1.164

  Nic.di Conti.
• l 1.165

  Mas.l.1
• m 1.166

  Nic.Pimenta
• a 1.167

  Maginu••.
• b 1.168

  Piol.l.7. ca. 1.
• c 1.169

  Lop. Castaneda L.1. Od. Barbosa. G. Bot Ben. Linscot. G. Arthus hist. c.26.27. & seq.
• d 1.170

  losephus Indus
• f 1.171

  Lud.vert.l.5.c.2.
• g 1.172

  Castaneda and Barbosa saith, that she is not married but as his Concubin••
• h 1.173

  Od.Barbosa.
• i 1.174

  L••u.13.45.
• k 1.175

  I. op.de Casta∣nedo. G.B.B.
• l 1.176

  Maglnus.
• m 1.177

  Od. Dar.
• n 1.178

  Caes.Fred.
• o 1.179

  Osorius.
• p 1.180

  Step.de Brit. 1600.
• q 1.181

  Supra cap. 5.
• r 1.182

  Hernan. ••opes de Castaneda. ••.1.c.14.
• s 1.183

  Funerall Rices.
• * 1.184

  A lease, of which see Cap. 12.
• t 1.185

  Inauguration of the new King.
• u 1.186

  The dub∣bing of the Nairo's.
• a 1.187

  Magin. Gi. Bo••er. Be••.
• b 1.188

  700000.foot.40000 horse. 700.elephants. 20000. horlots.
• c 1.189

  C.Fred.
• d 1.190

  The solem∣nity of bur∣ning of the wife after her husbands death.
• * 1.191

  The wife immured with hir dead husband.
• f 1.192

  Lud.Vert.li.6
• g 1.193

  Od••ricus.
• h 1.194

  Osorius libr. 3.
• i 1.195

  Od. Barbosa.
• k 1.196

  Liuschot.
• l 1.197

  Deuout litle fooles.
• m 1.198

  Odoricus
• n 1.199

  S. Iohn Man∣d ••••••
• o 1.200

  Nic•• di Conti.
• p 1.201

  Linschat. libr.1.c2.44.
• q 1.202

  Balhy ca. 28. & Arthus Dan. bist.Ind.O••.c.1.
• r 1.203

  Ociperate dying.
• s 1.204

  F.Fernandes epist. 1598.
• t 1.205

  Linschot. c. 44.
• u 1.206

  F. Fernand.
• * 1.207

  1598.
• x 1.208

  The titles of the Kings of Bisnagar.
• y 1.209

  Dis. of China pag 401.
• z 1.210

  Melebin Cotig••••••.
• b 1.211

  Siman ••••••
• b 1.212

  Em.de Veiga.
• c 1.213

  Mel••h. Cotig.
• d 1.214

  Gi.Rot.Bin.
• e 1.215

  Os••r.lib.4.
• f 1.216

  Magin.
• g 1.217

  Summario di.pop.orient.
• h 1.218

  Linscbot.c.15.
• a 1.219

  Christ. Acosta in fine Linschot. lib.1.cap.46. Thomas Lopez; &c.
• b 1.220

  Clus. Exot. lib. 5.cap.1.
• c 1.221

  Cap.4.
• d 1.222

  Cap.3.
• c 1.223

  De Bry part.4. Ind.Or.
• f 1.224

  ••••••inerarium.A Pigaset. Holland. Nau.
• g 1.225

  Icones de Bry Ind. Or.p.rt.4.
• h 1.226

  L.Vert.Lib.5.cap.22.
• i 1.227

  An. Galuano.
• k 1.228

  Maff. hist. Ind. lib.7.
• l 1.229

  An hundred and fiue Do∣drantes.
• m 1.230

  Linsc.c.48.
• n 1.231

  Paludanus.
• o 1.232

  Of this, be∣sides Linscho∣ten see Garcias Hort••. with Clusius notes. Ex••t lib.7.c.26.
• p 1.233

  Clusius descri∣beth this tree out of the Re∣lations of Pliny lib. 12. Curtius lib. 9. Strab••. l.5. Theophrastus lib.4. and men∣tioneth like kinds (if not the same) out of Lopez de Ca∣••agneda lib.7. Oustdo lib.6. Lope•• or Piga•••••••••• of Congo, &c. clus. Exet. lib.I.cap I.
• q 1.234

  Garcias ab Horto lib. ••. c.1. C. Acosta.c. 37. saith it growes most in Malabar.
• r 1.235

  The Plant Bettele.
• s 1.236

  Garcias ab Horto.i.1.c.1••.
• t 1.237

  Quasi Amomum ex Sina delatum.
• * 1.238

  Ginger.
• * 1.239

  Cloues.
• u 1.240

  Nutmegs.
• x 1.241

  Osor. de Reb. Em.lib.7. ••8.
• y 1.242

  Bezar-stone.
• z 1.243

  Garcias ab Horto. in Clus. Exot.lib.7.c.1.
• * 1.244

  Discou.
• a 1.245

  Psal. 104.25- and 26.
• b 1.246

  Gen. 1.9.
• c 1.247

  Psalm. 104.9
• d 1.248

  Ferem. 5.22.
• e 1.249

  Eccles.1 7.
• f 1.250

  Vid. Zane. de Oper. & G P. B. Ret. •••••• &c.
• g 1.251

  Apollonius Phil.l.5
• h 1.252

  Of the Islands of Asia.
• i 1.253

  P. Bert•• tab.
• k 1.254

  G. Bot.Ben.
• l 1.255

  A. Pigafe••ta.
• m 1.256

  Selebes.
• n 1.257

  Moratay.
• * 1.258

  I. Scal.
• o 1.259

  L. de Vrreta Hist. Ae ••••••
• p 1.260

  Some say that the Iewes were expelled out of Portugall before these ••••••
• r 1.261

  Gio. Bol.Ben.
• s 1.262

  This inscription was in the basis as Meursius translates it: Rbodo colossum •••••• quater cubi∣••s decem Su∣perbientem Lindius ••ee it Laches which words shew both the author Lindius •••••• and the height so, •••••• bites Meursius in trans••••t. Con∣stant.
• t 1.263

  Constant. Por∣phyroge••itus de ••d imp ••••••, Theophanis Chronicon.
• u 1.264

  Adrian. Ro∣man. Theat. Vrbium, l.2.
• x 1.265

  Herod. Thalia.
• y 1.266

  Plin. 1.5.c.31.
• z 1.267

  Ortel. Theat.
• * 1.268

  Quadi Geo∣graphia.
• * 1.269

  In Hak.voy∣ages the taking of Famagusta, &c. is largely related, To. 2. P.Contarenus de b••llo Turc.•• Ven.
• a 1.270

  Mat. 23.15.
• b 1.271

  Benefit by the Spaniard and Iesuite.
• c 1.272

  Mer••ator thinkes Iapan to b•• he Aure•• •••••• which agreeth not with Ptolo∣mey.l.7.c.2. who placeth it vn∣der the Line.
• d 1.273

  A strange Tree.
• e 1.274

  Customes in things indifferent are come∣ly or vncome∣ly, pro more loci.
• f 1.275

  Cos. Tur••ian.
• g 1.276

  Maffaeus.
• h 1.277

  2. Cor. 7.11.
• i 1.278

  An. Dom. 1598 Fran Pasius: Lud. Frois.
• k 1.279

  Al. Valignam.
• l 1.280

  L. Frois.
• m 1.281

  Out of the Frying-pan into the fire.
• n 1.282

  Bal. Gag••s.
• o 1.283

  A Conni-catching Tricke.
• p 1.284

  Cos.Tur.
• q 1.285

  Caspar.Vilela.
• a 1.286

  Baites in the iourney to Pa∣radise.
• b 1.287

  Pet Alca••••••••
• c 1.288

  Ios. •••••• His••or. India l.5.c.2.5.
• d 1.289

  All this is re∣presented to the eye in pi∣ctures by Theo∣dor•••• de Bry.A∣merica part ••.
• e 1.290

  Our Chau∣cer in the Fri∣ers prologue. Cor. Agrippa de vanit.c.64. and many of the Papists them∣selues confesse thus much of their confessio∣nists Aluar. Pe∣lag. Ouand. Ia∣cob. de Graf.&c. See Whites way to the Church. pag. 229.
• f 1.291

  concil. Trid. Sess.14.ca.5. can 6.7.
• g 1.292

  Etiam circum∣stantiatum mi∣nutias. Bellar.
• h 1.293

  Bellar.to.3.••.lib.de poeni∣tentia, totus.
• i 1.294

  Prouerb. 25.3••
• k 1.295

  I••r.17.9.
• l 1.296

  Bel.de poenit••.3.c.12.
• m 1.297

  Mat. 11.30.
• n 1.298

  Sheldons Mo∣tiues in the Preface.
• o 1.299

  L. Almeida.
• p 1.300

  Organtinus.
• q 1.301

  L. Frois.
• r 1.302

  In L. Frois his Epistle En∣glished Hack. to 2. of voiages you may reade them.
• f 1.303

  Gab.Matasus.1603.Eman.A••os••a.
• t 1.304

  M.Pol.li.3.
• u 1.305

  Hen.Cuyckius
• x 1.306

  Linsc.li.i.c.26
• y 1.307

  Arth.Dantis.bist. Ind.Orient.cap.28.
• z 1.308

  Epist.Iapon.1606. & 1607
• a 1.309

  G.Bot.Ben.
• b 1.310

  Discourse of China.
• c 1.311

  Pag.349.
• d 1.312

  Crudel.Hisp.
• e 1.313

  Francis. Va••z 1601.
• f 1.314

  G.B.B.part 4. lib••.3.
• g 1.315

  •••• Noort 1600.
• h 1.316

  Tho.Candish voyage, Ha••k. tom. 3.
• i 1.317

  On the Ile Capul.
• k 1.318

  Ant.Galuano
• l 1.319

  A. Pigasetta. in ••••••.
• m 1.320

  Mas. Transil.
• n 1.321

  Pigafetta.
• o 1.322

  Got. rthus pag.396.
• p 1.323

  Sir Fr. Drah••.
• q 1.324

  Mass.libr. 5.
• r 1.325

  Galuan••.
• s 1.326

  Iac. ••••••
• t 1.327

  Lud.Fernand. La.Masonius.
• u 1.328

  Got. Arthus pag 403.
• x 1.329

  Holland Na∣uig. 1598. & 99: per Bilibald. Strobe••••••
• y 1.330

  Gas.Ens li. I. ca. 5.
• z 1.331

  Iat Neccij Nauig.in octaua part. Ind. orient. de Bry.
• a 1.332

  Pig••setta.
• b 1.333

  Nauig. Hol∣land,••••••.per. B. Strobaeum. De Bry, part.5. Ind. Or. hath the pictures of these Gallies, &c.
• c 1.334

  Art. Hist. Ind. Orient.c. 46.
• d 1.335

  Od. Barbosa.
• e 1.336

  Hak.••••.3
• f 1.337

  M. Paul. l. 3.
• N 1.338

  di Conti.
• g 1.339

  Ver. l.6.
• h 1.340

  Scot.
• i 1.341

  Gio. Bot.Ben.
• k 1.342

  Od.Barbosa.
• l 1.343

  Bar. dec.2.l.9. ca••••••. Holland. Nau. Arthus. Isacius & ••••••.
• m 1.344

  Io.Isac.Pon∣tan ••••••. ••••∣stelodam. Nau. Batah. 1594.ap. De Bry, part.3.c.33.
• n 1.345

  Bilib. Strobaus
• o 1.346

  Nauig. Bat. 1594.c.39.
• p 1.347

  Th. Candish. Hak. 10.3.pag.822.
• q 1.348

  N••nig. Oliuer Noort.
• a 1.349

  Gi. Bot. Ben. Mass.l.4 O.Arthus Hist. Indiae Orient.cap.••0.
• b 1.350

  Linsch••t.
• c 1.351

  P. Bertius Tab.
• d 1.352

  Ortel. Maff.l.4.
• e 1.353

  Discoueries of the world.
• f 1.354

  See Lamberts perambul.
• g 1.355

  N.di Conti.
• h 1.356

  L. Vert.
• i 1.357

  Herman. de Bree. Arthus pag.359
• k 1.358

  M. Paul. lib.3.
• I 1.359

  Barbosa.
• m 1.360

  Lib. 1.
• n 1.361

  Linschot. An. Corsali.
• o 1.362

  Maff. 1.3.
• p 1.363

  Od.Barbosa.
• q 1.364

  Vert.••••.3.c.4.
• r 1.365

  Odoricus.
• s 1.366

  Her.de Bre••.
• t 1.367

  Georgius Spilbergins.
• u 1.368

  Herman. de Brec, ap.de Bry.part. 8.Ind. Or.
• * 1.369

  Chap. 10.
• x 1.370

  G. Bot. Ben.
• y 1.371

  Paul l. 3.c.19.
• z 1.372

  Linschoten.
• a 1.373

  Od. Barbosa.
• b 1.374

  Plin.l.6.c.22.
• * 1.375

  Psalme 24.1.